Home

Address: No.8, Economic Plot, Zhuantang Science and Technology

1. i ig Od 1 CDI E100 Series ig Wi erry fl pza EE H HH L l a 1 i eesse ii i l wW gt pi gt l D oN Main Circuit Wiring Diagram AA R S T Input U Three phase Comnet Earthing input power k Tir Is ACSPH 380V Model w wi H Ht D D d Output PB U V W CDI E100GOR4S2B rake Resistance Thee phase Comnest output CDI E100GOR75S2B CDI E100G1R5S2B CDI E100GOR4T2B Note CDI E100G0R75T2B 109 99 167 153 161 148 5 1 Plastic shell CDI E100G1R5T2B 2 The ordering of the terminals is CDI E100GOR75T4B subject to material object CDI E100G1R5T4B CDI E100G2R2T4B Model 2 Ceg Di 1 _ g Main Circuit Wiring Diagram R S THE Urhree phase Connect Earthing input power supply AC SPH 380V Input mi Model w wi h H D Di ca Output PB 4 U y L ake onnec CDI E100G2R2S2B Resistance Thiee phase to motor CDI E100G2R2T2B 135 122 167 153 171 158 5 Note F CDI E100G3R7T4B 1 Plastic shell 2 The ordering of the terminals is subject to material object Page 9 Chapter 2 Product Informatio
2. P PE R S T U vV W PB l J Grounding 3 phase input 3 phase output To power supply To the motor Brake resistor Wiring Diagram of Main Circuitof Model 3 of Machine Type E180 P Z PE R S T U V W PB O E C Grounding 3 phase input 3 phase output To power supply To the motor Brake resistor Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 4 of Machine Type E180 11kW 30kW gt R S T U y WwW P PB L J om Grounding 3 phase input 3 phase output 2 To powersupply To themotor Brake unit Brake resistor 37kW 45kW R S T P U V W Grounding 3 phase input 3 phase output To power supply Brake unit To the motor S55kW 75KW R 5 T P PD U V W Grounding 3 phase input 3 phase output To powersupply Brake unit To the motor Page 19 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 3 2 Precautions for wiring the input side of the main circuit 1 Installation for Circuit Breaker MCCB To protect the circuit a MCCB or fuse should be installed between the power supply of the AC main circuit and the input terminals of R S or T 2 Residual current circuit breaker When selecting residual current circuit breakers for connection to input terminals of R S or T the one that is not affected by Highest Frequency is preferred in order to avoid any possible misoperation For example NV series ma
3. Page 10 Main Circuit Wiring Diagram R S T U v w B Ghree phase L whisecpiase Earthing input output Connect power Connect motor supply Terminal for Maintenance Note Model 3 adopts plastic shell The ordering of the terminals is subject to material object Brake Resistance Chapter 2 Product Information Model 4 gd mM 3 aE E180 IDE LIC T y z Ir EEGEEREEEE W y m T 9 N Wi D2 W D1 D Main Circuit Wiring Diagram 11 30kW F RISIT U v w P PB Model w wi H Hi D Di D2 a CDI E180G011 P015T4 250 180 420 405 197 187 126 7 CDI E180G015 P018 5T4 37 45kW CDI E180G018 5 P022T4 CDI E180G022 P030T4 _ 300 190 460 445 219 209 148 7 a A RL a W CDI E180G030 P037T4 CDI E180G037 P045T4 355 290 530 515 267 257 174 9 55 75kW CDI E180G045 P055T4 CDI E180G055 P075T4 TLR S T APAP U Vv Ww 390 290 600 585 267 257 174 9 CDI E180G075 P093T4 Note the ordering of the termin
4. Terminal Reference Value Description Dix 1 Forward Running FWD 2 Reverse Running REV Run Kl Kl K2 Command 5 DIx 0 0 top K2 E Series 0 1 Stop Dly Frequency inverter 1 0 REV COM 1 1 Forward Three line Mode 1 Set P2 0 11 2 Any three terminals of Dix DIy and DIn among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse running of the motor in which Terminal DIx is used as running enable terminal and DIx amp Dly are used as terminal of confirming the running direction Din is the active level and DIx amp Dly are the active PLS When the running is needed the Terminal DIn must be closed at first and then the PLS of DIx or Dly are used to realize forward or reverse control of the motor When the shutdown is needed it is realized through disconnecting the signal of Terminal Din The terminal function references are as below Reference Value Description Forward Running FWD Reverse Running REV 3 line Running Control SB1 DIx SB2 DIY E Series SB Frequency DIn inverter COM SB1 is the button of normally opened forward running SB2 is the button of normally opened reverse running and SB3 is the button of normally closed stop Page 159 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 3 line Control Mode 2 Set P2 0 11 3 Any three terminals of Dix DIy and DIn amon
5. o 1000pF y DI2 ___ e _ l 12K 1 2K Uke Dry Contact Common Cathode Wiring Method posses bew ees priete shetty Adopt internal power 24V P24V Adoptexternal power24V P24V and must be shorted with OP and disconnect with OP i i i 5 E i 2 5 3 Zm Zv OP 55 gt o 2 i 2 amp Internalsupply i 25 o K 3 8 power 10V 30V l 38 Yeon EE k ge k3 Ee o pi 7 bp RY 1 i DN i COM External supply D12 power 10V 30V Control Panel 5 Frequency inverter Adopt internal power 24V and disconnect with OP and OP is shorted with COM oe Adopt external power 24V P24V and disconnect with OP Page 28 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Leaking type Wiring Method Adoptinternal power24V_ 4 and be shorted with QP OP E s A E a io Si Signal 5 eon 2 5 z j 2 8 3 i z E Internal supply I 1 power 10V 30V j External Controller ales ZA a Zz Source type Wiring Method Adopt external power 24V i Adoptinternal power 24V and i ddi ith OP and disconnect wit P24V must be shorted with OF OP Internal supply power 10V 30V
6. No Fault Constant Overcurrent Accelerated Overcurrent Decelerated Overcurrent Constant Overvoltage Accelerated Overvoltage Fault Record 1 Last Time 6 Decelerated Overvoltage Module Fault Undervoltage Frequency inverter Overload 0 Motor Overload 1 Input Default Phase 2 Output Default Phase 3 External Fault 4 Communication Abnormity 15 Frequency inverter Overheat 16 Frequency inverter Hardware Fault 17 Motor to ground Short Circuit 8 Motor Identification Error Fault Record 2 9 Motor Off load 20 PID Feedback Loss 21 User Customerized Fault 1 22 User Customerized Fault 2 23 Power on Time Arrival 24 Running Time Arrival 25 Encoder Fault 26 Parameter Read Write Abnormity 27 Motor Overheat 28 Larger Speed Deviation 29 Motor Overspeed 30 Initial Position Error 31 Current Detection Fault Fault Record 3 32 Contactor 33 Abnormity of Current Detection 34 Fast Current limiting Timeout 35 Motor Switch at Running 36 24V Power Fault 37 39 Reservation 40 Buffer Resistance Fault Page 65 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code P6 0 03 Fault Frequency 1 P6 0 04 Fault Current 1 Bus Voltage 1 when at P6 0 05 Faut o S Function name Setting scope Input Terminal State 1 P6 0 06 when at fault Output Terminal State 1 P6 0 07 whe at fault Frequency inverter State 1 P6 0 08 When
7. DELIXI HANGZHOU INVERTER CO LTD Address No 8 Economic Plot Zhuantang Science and Technology Park Zhuantang Street Xihu District Hangzhou Zhejiang Technical support 400 188 8155 Sales Tel 0086 571 87761308 Wobsite http www hz dclixi com Email hzdlxsales delixi com helen delixi 163 com Version September 2013 DELIXI CDI E Series Frequency Inverter User Manual Standard GB T 12668 2 2002 GB 12668 3 2003 Please carefully read this User Manual before installation and operation and keep it properly for further use A 2S Ss ARB DELIXI HANGZHOU INVERTER co LTD To Users To Users Notices of Onsite Installation and Operation Respectful User Thanks for your Option of E Series Frequency inverter manufactured by Delixi Hangzhou Inverter Co Ltd In order that you can better use the product please pay attention to the following 1 After frequency inverter is installed and commissioned fasten the components especially connecting bolt of the line which shall cause fire accident due to heat at the connection if not fastened 2 Design of installation on the site should be reasonable to maintain excellent ventilation 3 In and out lines of the frequency
8. Fixed Time of Timer 2 t e a Fixed Time of Timer 1 Timer Input Terminal Signal Timer Reset Terminal Signal Timer 1 Time Arrival i i 1 i i i T 1 i i 1 i i 1 I i i I T i at Signal p i i Timer 2 Time Arrival at Signal Timer 1 Time Arrival at Signal but Timer 2 Time Non arrival at Signal Page 173 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 14 Internal Operation Module Function E Series Frequency inverter has four built in operation modules which collect the data of two function codes of the frequency inverter remove the value after the decimal point to conduct simple operation and finally output the operation results into special use occasions Certainly the operation results can also be used to realize the actions of multi functional output terminals and the output of the analog signal Operation Input A Address gt P3 2 28 P3 2 31 P3 2 34 P3 2 37 Special Occasions for Operation L gt Output setting source is Module Non setting operation result Control gt eras gt es Be Setting Operation Coefficient 7 ia i Operation Result 2 Greater Operation Input B Address rera esult than 0 the multi functional rere eer P3 2 35 P3 2 38 gt sr perdio gt P9 0 46 pe ouput terminal function is 58 P9 0 47 Operation Result 4 Greater fondi than 0 the multi functional Eep
9. P1 0 18 000 0 Stop DC Braking Hold Time P1 0 19 000 Stop DC Braking Current P1 0 20 Page 196 000 0 Stop DC Braking Time Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case If the automatic distance reset is required the following parameters are required to set After the shutdown of the frequency inverter is completed every time the distance is automatically reset to zero Function code Setting value Function code Attribution P2 0 01 00 Remove manual length reset function of DI2 k M5 is determined by Control B M4 is determined by ee Control C P3 2 06 MS take Reverse signal output of M4 P3 2 10 M4 take signal in operation P3 2 11 MS signal used for length automatic reset The parameters for optimal performance of constant line speed fixed distance control are shown in the table below they don t need to be set in normal conditions If the setting is required please refer to the explanation for setting of the function codes Function code Function name Factory value Description Attribution P4 0 08 PID Deviation Limit 000 0 P4 0 09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00 00 P4 0 10 Proportional Gains KP2 020 0 P4 0 11 Integral Time TI2 02 00 P4 0 12 Derivative Time TD2 00 000 P4 0 13 PID Switch Conditions 0 Refer to Description P4 0 14 PID Switch Deviation 1 for Setting of Function P4 0 15 PID Switch Deviation 2 Cod
10. P3 1 03 Wobbulating Reference Mode 0 Relative to Reference frequency 1 Relative to Highest Frequency P3 1 04 Wobbulating Range 000 0 100 0 P3 1 05 Kicking Range 00 0 50 0 P3 1 06 Wobbulating Cycle 0000 1s 3000 0s P3 1 07 The above function codes are used Rise Time of Wobbulating Triangular Wave details wobbulating function Function code Function name 000 1 100 0 Setting scope for wobbulating function Refer to 7 1 16 for more P3 1 08 Reference Length 00000m 65535m P3 1 09 Actual Length 00000m 65535m P3 1 10 Impulse Count per meter 0000 1 6553 5 The above function codes are used for fixed length control Refer to 7 1 9 for more details fixed length function Function code Function name Setting scope P3 L1 Reference Count Value 00001 65535 P3 1 12 Designated Count Value 00001 65535 The above function codes are used for counting control Refer to 7 1 10 for more details Counting Function Function code Function name Setting scope P3 1 13 Distance Set value 1 3200 0 3200 0 P3 1 14 Distance Set value 2 3200 0 3200 0 P3 1 15 Impulse Count per Distance 000 00 600 00 The above function codes are used for distance control Refer to 7 1 11 for more details Distance Control Function Page 125
11. PO 0 12 Deceleration Time 0000 1s 6500 0s Machine type The acceleration time refers to time required to raise the frequency inverter from zero frequency to reference frequency of the acceleration and deceleration time set by Function Code PO 1 07 The deceleration time refers to time required to reduce the frequency inverter reference frequency of the acceleration and deceleration time to zero frequency See the Description of the Figure below Output frequency Reference frequency of acceleration ey n and deceleration time 1 Set frequency f Time gt He Actual deceleration time i l l l l l Actual acceleration time gt Actual acceleration time gt lt gt Actual deceleration time 1 Page 77 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope Type of Motor0 Common motor 1 Varible frequency motor 2 Synchronous Motor Invalid E100 This function code is used to set the type of the load motor equipped with the frequency inverter 0 Common motor Because heat radiation effect of the common motor becomes worse when running at low speed relative electronic thermal protection value should be adjusted properly low speed compensating performance of motor protection mode is to lower protection threshold of motor overload when running frequency is less than 30Hz 1 Variable frequency motor Varia
12. t ereerrerererererererererereerereeossrosereecreneeerseeseseorersrereneserreeosrereeene 215 A2 3 Radio noise filters cece cer ttt ereerereeereererereerereseeeeeorenrensreeecreseeeeroseseneerere e216 A2 4 Remote Operation Keyboard setteterterterterteetettettertertertertertettenrereereereeneeeeent 216 A2 5 Energy Consumption Brake Unit and Brake Resistance ttrt ere teeerererere ereere erete 216 Appendix 3 Multi function V O Expansion Cardsss ttt ttsceeceeees Bee cee cee cee cee cee cee ee cee cee seveeeeeeD19 Appendix 4 Expansion Card of Encoder Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communications set setts see cte tee cee cee eee cee nee cee nee 223 Appendix 6 Expansion Card of Injection Molding Machine tr err errrre ree ete tree reese eee ees 224 HI Foreword Foreword Thank you for choosing E Series Frequency inverter manufactured by Delixi Hangzhou Inverter Co Ltd It includes CDI E100 Series and CDI E180 Series in which CDI E180 Series can also connect the expansion card externally Before using it please read this manual carefully so as to guarantee correct operation Erroneous operation might result in malfunction faults or shortened life span of the equipment or even personal injury Therefore users are advised to read carefully this manual and abide by it during operation The manual is a standard attached document Please keep it for maintenance and repair in the future Asi
13. 1 0 1 0 0 means 1010 0 When actual distance reaches the set value 1 value set by P3 1 13 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is the Distance Set Value 1 Arrival 56 When actual distance reaches the set value 2 value set by P3 1 14 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is the Distance Set Value2 Arrival 57 In the process of distance control the reset operation to actual distance can be realized through digital input terminal Corresponding digital input terminal function is the Distance Reset 54 Actual distance can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 30 Distance Set Value 1 P3 1 13 Distance Set Valuel Arrival Count Multi functional Output Impulse Total Distance Impulses Impulses Actual Set Vahid E gt per Distance P3 1 15 gt P9 0 30 A Distance Set Value Arrival Multi functional Output 3 gt Terminal Output i istance Set P2 0 28 P2 0 32 57 Distance Value 2 P3 1 14 A Reset Distance Reset P2 0 00 P2 0 09 54 meres LTD LL LL Le Bossens FLT U UU A U ae Count Impulse Set Value
14. Chapter 6 Description of Parameters P3 2 Built in Logic PLC Function Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 the input of this relay is determined by this Relay Control WordA 1 the input of this relay is determined by this Relay Control Word B Intermediate 2 the input of this relay is determined by this Delay Relay Relay Control Word C Control Ones Relay 1 M1 Tens Relay 2 M2 Hundreds Relay 3 M3 Thousands Relay 4 M4 Ten Thousands Relay 5 M5 This function is used to set which control word determines the Intermediate Delay Relay When at 0 the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by Control Word A refer to the Description for Function Code P3 2 01 When at 1 the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by Control Word B refer to the Description for Function Code P3 2 02 P3 2 06 When at 2 the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by thousands and hundreds of Control Word C refer to the Description for Function Code P3 2 07 P3 2 11 Refer to the explanation for 7 1 12 Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Reference 0 1 Reference 1 Ones M1 Tens M2 Hundreds M3 Thousands M4 Ten Thousands M5 Intermediate Relay Control Word A W hen which digit of Function Code P3 2 00 is 0 this function Code is used to compulsorily set corresponding relay of this digit at 0 or 1 Refer to 7 1 12 for more details S
15. Check with naked eyes No Fault Check the impedance between terminals Disconnect the frequency inverter and measure with a tester the resistance between the group of R S k gt and the group o UVW ae respectively Digital AVO meter analog measuring meter Insulation resistance Megohmmeter inspection between output terminal and grounding terminal Release connection of U V and W and fasten motor wire 500V type megohm meter Page 213 Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts Items for inspection Description Period Yearly Biennial Inspection method Criteria Measuring instrument Main Circuit Filter capacitor Is there any liquid seepage Is the safety hole bulging out Is the capacitor bulging out Check with naked eyes Measure with capacitance meters No fault exceeds 85 of the rated capacity Devices for measuring capacitance Any wobbling noise durin operation Any damage to the contacts Listen Check with naked eyes No fault Resistance Whether resistance insulation is damaged Whether resistor wire is damaged open circuit Visual inspection Disconnect one and measure it with test instrument There is no fault Error must be within 10 of resistance value Digital multimeter simulation test instrument Protecti on
16. SG Positive Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication SG Negative Signal Terminal of Rs485 Communication Support MODBUS RTU Protocol Expansion Card for E102 E102 485 ee Communication 2Mechanical Installation The frequency inverter shall be installed when it switched off completely Align RS485 Communication with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency inverter and then fix them with screws E102485 Appearance of E180 485 Appearance of E102 485 Page 223 Appendix 6 Expansion Card of Injection Molding Machine Appendix 6 Expansion Card of Injection Molding Machine 1Introduction E180 I O Expansion Card is developed by Delixi Hangzhou Inverter Co Ltd and applied for CDI E180 Series Terminal I O its specific configuration is as below Configuration Description 2 way Digital Input Terminal DI7 DI8 Refer to Description for use of specific functions of Function Code P2 0 06 P2 0 07 G1 Connect proportional flow signal negativeS 1 Connect proportional flow signal positive 2 way Analog Input G2 Connect proportional voltage signal negativeS2 Connect proportional Terminal voltage signal positive G1 S1 G2 S2 Note proportional flow and proportional voltage signal are DC Current Signal 0 1A and corrective wiring shall be made according to the flow of circuit current 2 Mechanical Installation The frequency inverter shall be ins
17. Arrival Output Designated Count Arrival Output Page 168 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 11 Distance Control Function Function Code Function name Setting Scope Factory Value P3 1 13 Distance Set value 1 3200 0 3200 0 0000 0 P3 1 14 Distance Set value 2 3200 0 3200 0 0000 0 P3115 Impulse Count per Distance 000 00 600 00 000 00 E Series Frequency inverter has built in Distance Control Function In the application corresponding digital input terminal function is required to be set as Encoder A Input Function 52 and Encoder B Input Function 53 Terminal DI5 and DI6 of CDI E100 Series can connect high speed impulse of the encoder the impulse frequency of the encoder of other terminals is not allowed more than 200Hz The impulse frequency of CDI E180 Series encoder is not allowed more than 200Hz In case of exceeding 200Hz the open collector encoder expansion card is required to be configured set P0 1 26 10 The phase sequence of the encoder determines the plus minus of actual distance Actual Distance Total Impulses from Acquisition of Terminal Impulses per distance For the digital tube has five digits when the distance is less than 999 9 all displayed decimal points of the digital tube completely indicate minus value e g
18. P1 1 13 0 Digital Reference P1 1 15 1 External Terminal Vfl Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference 4 PULS Reference DI6 Torque Reference Source 5 Communication Reference 6 MIN VF1 VF2 7 MAX VFI VF2 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 12 Standby Torque Source 1 13 Standby Torque Source 2 Torque Digital Reference 200 0 200 0 Torque Control FWD Frequency Limit Torque Control REV Frequency Limit 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 000 00Hz Highest Frequency Torque Acceleration Time 0000 0s 6500 0s Torque Deceleration Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 5 3 Group P2 Input Output Terminal Function Function Function n Setting scope rie unction name g pi Group P2 0 Basic Group P2 0 00 DI1 Terminal Function O No Function P2 0 01 DI2 Terminal Function Forward any P2 0 02 DI3 Terminal Function 3 Three wire Running Control Forward Jogging P2 0 03 DI4 Terminal Function Reverse Jogging 7 7 Terminal UP P2 0 04 DIS Terminal Function Terminal DOWN P Free Stop P2005 DIG Terminal Function Multiplex Directive Terminal 1 P2 0 06 DI7 Terminal Function 10 Multiplex Directive Terminal 2 7 11 Multiplex Directive Terminal 3 P2 0 07 DI8 Terminal Function 12 Multiplex Directive Terminal 4 P2 0 08 DI9 Terminal Function penis Paa
19. Percentage of Ending PO 1 21 000 0 100 0 Phase of Curve S Parameter P0 1 20 and P0 1 21 respectively defines the time scale of starting point and ending point of Curve S 1 These two parameters need to meet PO 1 20 P0 1 21 lt 100 0 refer to the Description for the figure below Output Frequency Rated Frequency Tl T2 Tl T2 H i T1 is the value set by Function Code P0 1 20 the slope of the output frequency gradually increases from zero within this period of time T2 is the value set by Function Code P0 1 21 the slope of the output frequency gradually decreases to zero within this period of time Within the time between T1 and T2 the change on slope of the output frequency keeps constant Function code Function Name Setting scope PO 1 22 Hopping Frequency 1 000 00Hz Highest Frequency PO 1 23 Hopping Frequency 2 000 00Hz Highest Frequency PO 1 24 Hopping Frequency scope 000 00Hz Highest Frequency The hopping frequency function is set so that running frequency of the frequency inverter can avoid load resonance band of the driving system E Series Frequency inverter can set two hopping frequency points after setting even the reference frequency is within load resonance band the output frequency of the frequency inverter will also be automatically adjusted out of load resonance band to avoid running on resonant frequency refer to the Description for the figure below Page 85
20. Proportional Gains KP2 000 0 100 0 P4 0 11 Integral Time TI2 00 01s 10 00s P4 0 12 Derivative Time Td2 00 000s 10 000s P4 0 13 PID Switch Conditions 0 No Switch 1 Switch through Terminals 2 Switch through Deviation P4 0 14 PID Switch Deviation 1 000 0 P4 0 15 P4 0 15 PID Switch Deviation 2 P4 0 14 100 0 P4 0 16 PID Initial Value 000 0 100 0 P4 0 17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000 00 650 00s xe at foe ef xe fat fat fat x ot fat ot fot P4 0 18 PID Feedback Loss Detection 000 0 No Judgment on Feedback Loss 000 1 100 0 x P4 0 19 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time 00 0s 20 0s Xe P4 0 20 PID Stop Operation 0 No Operation 1 Operation Group P4 1 Communication Group Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 57600 Data Format No Verification 8 N 2 Even Parity Verification 8 E 1 Odd Parity Verification 8 O 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 38400 6 0 1 2 3 No Verification 8 N 1 Local Machine Address 000 Broadcast Address 001 249 Response Delay 00 20ms Communication Timeout 00 0 Invalid 00 1s 60 0s Data Transmission Formai 0 ASCII Mode Reservation 1 RTU Mode Page 61 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 6 Group P5 Keyboard Display Function code Function name Setting scope Grou
21. 0 4mA 20m lt A input It can be used as Digital Input Terminal through setting 2 way Analog Input Terminal FM1 FM2 which can not only be used as output voltage OV 10V but output current 0 4mA 20mA 1 way open collector output YO DC 48V 50Ma below 1 way Impulse output FMP Frequency Range between 0 01kHz 100 00kHz 2 way Relay Output T1 T2 DC 30V 1A below and AC 250V 3A below Note YO and FMP are common YO FMP terminal but only one can be used at the same time Output Terminal Page 6 2 way Analog Input Terminal FM1 FM2 which can not only be used as output voltage OV 10V but output current 0 4mA 20mA 1 way open collector output YO DC 48V 50Ma below Additional 2 way open collector output YO1 YO2 can be added through external I O expansion card 1 way Impulse output FMP Frequency Range between 0 01kHz 100 00kHz 2 way Relay Output T1 T2 DC 30V 1A below and AC 250V 3A below Note YO and FMP are common YO FMP terminal but only one can be used at the same time Chapter 2 Product Information Specification uonesrunuru op The control panel is directly equipped with RS485 Communication Interface and supports Standard MODBUS Protocol The control panel is not equipped with built in RS485 Comm unication Interface so external communication expansion card is required It supports Standard MODBUS Protocol External Connection of E180 485 Expansion Card Be ab
22. 100 P1 1 05 P1 1 03 P1 1 01 Frequency P1 1 00 P1 1 02 P1 1 04 Rated Frequency Note the voltage cannot be set too large when at low frequency or the frequency inverter may have overcurrent fault or its motor may be burnt Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 06 V F Overexcited Gain 000 200 064 In the deceleration process of the frequency inverter the pumping voltage can make DC bus voltage rise the overexcited control can restrain the rise of DC bus voltage to avoid occurrence of overvoltage fault The larger the overexcited gain is the stronger the restraint effect is but if the overexcited gain is too large it is easy to lead to increase of the output current even overcurrent fault As for the occasions where the rise of DC bus voltage is not great or have brake resistance it suggests setting the overexcited gain at 0 Note this function code is only valid when the control mode is V F Control i e P0 0 02 0 Page 94 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Digital Reference P1 1 08 External Terminal VF1 Reference External Terminal VF2 Reference Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference MIN VFI VF2 MAX VF1 VF2 Operation Result 1 Vector Control Torque Upper Frequency CHIDNRWNHE SD Operation Result 2 10
23. 180GOR75T4B 1 5 3 4 2 3 0 75 180G1R5T4B 5 0 3 7 L5 80G2R2T4B 5 8 5 0 v2 m m 80G3R7 P5 T4B 3 4 10 5 15 8 8 13 3 180G5R5MT4B 5 9 8 5 8 5 15 5 13 5 5 5 5 180G5R5 P7R5 B 8 5 11 15 5 20 13 17 5 5 7 5 80G7R5 PO11 4B 11 17 20 5 26 17 25 7 5 11 5 80G011MT4 17 26 25 ll 80G011 P015 4BL 17 21 26 35 25 32 11 15 180G015 P018 5T4BL 21 24 35 38 5 32 37 15 18 5 1806018 5 P022T4 24 30 38 5 46 5 37 45 18 5 22 80G022 P030 4 30 40 46 5 62 45 60 22 30 mH o 806030 P037 4 40 50 62 76 60 75 30 37 1806037 P045 4 50 60 76 92 75 90 37 45 180G6045 P055 60 72 92 113 90 110 45 55 180G055 P075 72 100 113 157 110 152 55 75 QAQaya aya aqyaqsjqyaraqyayayaqyayayja So a i ojo m 80G075 P093 Order explanation During order please enter type specifica 100 116 157 180 152 176 75 93 ion of the product and provide parameter load type or other information relating to the motor as much as possible For any special requirement please consult with technology department of the Company Page 8 Chapter 2 Product Information 2 4 Appearance and installation size
24. 3 3 digit Decimal Point P5 0 16 Customized Display of Decimal Point In some conditions the users want to let the frequency inverter not display the frequency but some values that have linear relationship with frequency The users can adjust the corresponding relation between display value and frequency of the frequency inverter through modification to Function Code P5 0 15 This display value is called Customized Display Value P5 0 16 is used to set the decimal places of customized display value e g The customized display coefficient of P5 0 15 is 0 5000 the customized display decimal point of P5 0 16 is 3 and the frequency is 20 00Hz the customized display value shall be 2000 0 5000 1 000 display three decimal points Page 143 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Selection Display of Function Parameter Group Ones 0 Only display basic group 1 Display the menus at all levels Tens 0 Don t display Group P7 1 Display Group P7 2 Reservation Hundreds 0 Don t display correction parameter group 1 Display correction parameter group Thousands 0 Don t display code group 1 Display code group Ten Thousands Reservation When the function code is at P0 0 01 0 its function determine what the parameters of the function code is displayed in detail Function code Function name Setting scope Fact
25. 3 Verify if the crating voltage of frequency inverter is same as the input voltage of it Dangerous 4 Do not perform withstand test with frequency inverter 5 Fasten terminal screw with appointed fasten torque 1 Please check if grounding terminal is grounded before connect main loop Refer to 3 5 2 Terminal sequence should base on actual object 3 Rated input voltage 220V AC single phase frequency 50 60Hz 220V AC three phase frequency 50 60Hz Attention 380V AC three phase frequency 50 60Hz 4 Allowable fluctuation voltage 10 fluctuation 15 Allowable fluctuation Frequency 2 Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1 of Machine Type E100 Input R S T ees eet power Earthing Output PB fa U V W C L Three phase J Brake Resistance output Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 2 of Machine Type E100 Input R S T Connect power_ Earthing supply o Output PB U V WwW maa _ Three phase Brake Resistance output Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1 of Machine Type E180 P PE R S T U V WwW PB l J J Earthing Three phase input Three phase output to power supply to the motor Brake Resistance Page 18 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Wiring Diagram of Main Circuitof Model 20f Machine Type E180
26. 6 MIN VF1 VF2 The torque reference is given by the input value of VF1 and VF2 whichever is lower 7 MAX VFI VF2 The torque reference is given by the input value of VF1 and VF2 whichever is larger 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 The torque reference is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation module Refer to the Description for Function Code P3 2 26 P3 2 39 for more details of the operation module The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9 0 46 P9 0 49 Page 98 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 12 Standby Torque Source 1 13 Standby Torque Source 2 Standby Torque Source 1 and Standby Torque Source 2 are reserved by the manufacturer as frequency sources used for special occasions in future so the users may ignore them as usual Note when the torque is set by VF1 amp VF2 multiplex directive PULSE communication and operation results the corresponding range is the value set by P1 1 15 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 15 Torque Digital Reference 200 0 200 0 150 0 When at P1 1 14 0 the setting value of this function code determines the torque reference which is the percentage relative to the rated torque of the motor Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Torque Control FWD Frequency P1 1 16 ee 000 00Hz Highest F
27. Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope 0 Keyboard Reference No Power off Memory 1 Keyboard Reference Power off Memory 2 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference 3 External Terminal VF1 Reference 4 External Terminal VF2 Reference Option of A Frequency 5 PULS Reference DI6 Source 6 Multiplex Directive Reference 7 Simple PLC Reference 8 PID Control Reference 9 Communication Reference 10 Operation Result 1 11 Operation Result 2 12 Operation Result 3 13 Operation Result 4 0 Keyboard Reference No Power off Memory The initial value of the reference frequency is the value set by Function Code P0 0 05 and it can be changed through Key A amp V on the keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN After the frequency inverter powers on again after power off the reference frequency is set to value set by P0 0 05 1 Keyboard Reference Power off Memory The initial value of the reference frequency is the value set by Function Code P0 0 05 and it can be changed though KeyA amp Y on the keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN After the frequency inverter powers on again after power off the reference frequency is the frequency at the time of power off and it can be saved through Key A amp V on the keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN 2 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference The reference frequency is given by the potentiometer on operation panel The impact of zero offset or voltage attenuation caused by overlong keyboard lines can be a
28. External Controller OPis shorted withCOM 4 Description for Circuit Wiring of Multi functional Output Terminal AC Circuit The AC Circuit can only be used for multi functional relay output terminal If it is to drive inductive load e g electromagnetic relay and contactor the surge voltage absorber shall be installed e g RC Absorber the leakage current shall be less than the holding current of controlled contactor or relay as shown in the figure below Page 29 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter AC220V Contactor or Relay Coil Multi functional Relay Output Terminal Ee Absorption Circui R 100 500 Q C 0 1 0 2 u F DC Circuit The DC Circuit can not only be used for multi functional open collector output terminal attention for wiring polarity but for multi functional relay output terminal If it is to drive DC Magnetic Circuit the fly wheel diode attention for polarity as shown in the figure below Internal P24V Power Supply or External P24V Power Supply Contactor or Relay Coil Multi functional Output Terminal 4 ne DC Absorption Circuit 5 Description for Circuit Wiring of Impulse Output Terminal When the function code is P2 1 20 0 Terminal YO FMP is used as Impulse Output Terminal The default circuit is passive impulse output If
29. P2 0 09 DI10 Terminal Function 5 External Fault Input Page 47 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Page 48 16 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time Selection Terminal 1 17 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time Selection Terminal 2 18 Frequency Source Selection Terminal 1 19 Frequency Source Selection Terminal 2 20 Frequency Source Selection Terminal 3 21 Running Command Selection Terminal 1 22 Running Command Selection Terminal 2 23 UP DOWN Reference Reset 24 Prohibition of Acceleration amp Deceleration 25 PID Pause 26 PLC State Reset 27 Wobbulating Pause 28 Counter Input 29 Counter Reset 30 Length Counting Input 31 Length Reset 32 Torque Control Prohibition 33 PULS Impulse Input 34 Immediate DC Brake 35 External Fault Normally closed Input 36 Frequency Modification Enable 37 PID Action Direction Negation 38 External Stop Terminal 1 39 External Stop Terminal 2 40 PID Integral Stop 41 PID Parameter Switch 42 Speed Control Torque Control Switch 43 Emergency Stop 44 Deceleration DC Brake 45 User Defined Fault 1 46 User Defined Fault 2 47 Running Time Reset 48 Timer Input Terminal 1 49 Timer Input Terminal 2 50 Timer Reset Terminal 1 51 Timer Reset Terminal 2 52 Encoder Phase A Input 53 Encoder P
30. P9 0 03 Output Voltage Output current when the frequency inverter runs 1V P9 0 04 Bus Voltage Voltage on DC Bus of the frequency inverter 0 1V When the frequency inverter runs the output torque is the percentage of rated torque of the motor P9 0 06 Output Power Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0 1kW P9 0 05 Output Torque 0 1 P9 0 07 Input Terminal Status Check whether the input terminal has signal input P9 0 08 ou Terminal tatus P9 0 09 VFI Voltage Check the voltage between VF1 and GND P9 0 10 VF2 Voltage Check the voltage between VF2 and GND Gistont Displa Display coefficient P5 0 15 and the value after P9 0 11 Value Play conversion of Decimal Point P5 0 16 through customerization Actual Counting View actual counting value of the frequency Value inverter for counting function View actual counting value of the frequenc P9 0 13 Actual Length Value inverter for fixed length function s Product of PID reference value and PID reference feedback quantity Product of PID feedback value and PID reference feedback rang Check whether the output terminal has signal output P9 0 12 P9 0 14 PID Reference PID Feedback PULS Impulse frequency Feedback Speed Actual output frequency when the frequency inverter runs PLC Stage Display which stage the Simple PLC runs at Voltage before Vf1 Voltage between VF1 and GND before Vf1 Correction correction Voltage before
31. Standby Torque Source 3 11 Standby Torque Source 4 0 Digital Reference P1 1 08 The upper limit of the vector control torque is given by the value at based on Function Code P1 1 08 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference The vector control torque is given by the analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input terminal VF1 VF2 VFI and VF2 can input 0OV 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and the upper limit of torque the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 The deviation between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 05 P8 1 12 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference The vector control is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals Terminal Function 9 12 refer to the Description for Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details 4 PULS Reference DI6 The vector control is set by high speed impulse freq
32. _pT POE we Series Motor Terminal Start O Di COM THA Multi functional Output Relay 1 eQ TB The default is the running signal Reference parameters P2 0 29 PID HO P24 TG Feedback Dig T2A T COM Multi functional Output Relay 2 L J T The default is fault indication sae Reference parameters P2 0 30 eget errata T2C Distance Rese O D2 COM Rotating Speedn PULS Max Input X 60_X PID Reference Impulses of Encoder Tf the diameter of detected pressurizing roller is Dmm it is line speed 3 14 D n Line Speedv PULS Max Input X 60 X PID Reference Impulses of Encoder X PID Reference Feedback Range K X PID Reference If K 1000 PID Reference value is the line speed with unit m m If K 100 PID Reference value is the line speed with unit dm m Calculation for Impulse per meter P Impulses of Encoder x1000 a XD Ifthe operation result P Value is larger than 600 the P Value can be reduced 10 by times The unit of corresponding distance value can also be reduced 10 by times from meter to decimeter Page 194 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Explanation for PID Constant Speed Fixed Length Control Parameters Function name Factory value Description Attribution Option for Running Control Mode Start Key Run on Control Panel 1 Start the External Terminal Dil P2 0 00 01 Option of A Frequency Source 8 The freque
33. circuit and control circuit Operation check Is the output voltage balanced for all the phases After executing sequential protection there should be no fault in the display circuit Measure the voltage among terminals U V and W Short circuit and open frequency inverter protection circuit output For 200V 400 model the difference in the voltage of each phase should not exceed 4V 8V Digital AVO meter calibrating voltmeter Cooling system Cooling fan Any abnormal vibration or noise Any loosened connections Turn the tightening connection of the fan after switching off the power supply Rotation smooth and no fault Display Meter Is the displayed value correct Check the reading of the meter outside the panel Check the set values Voltmeter ammeter The entire operating site Any abnormal vibration or noise Any abnormal smells Check with your ears nose and eyes Check for overheat or damage Note the values in brackets apply to 400V type frequency inverters Page 214 No fault Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts Users of this series product can choose to install additional peripherals in accordance with the operating conditions and needs A2 1 Alternative Current Reactor ACL Alternative current reactor
34. for Min Inpuf of Curve 3 100 0 100 0 Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 nput P2 1 04 P2 1 08 Corresponding reference for Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 Input 100 0 100 0 Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input P2 1 06 P2 1 10 Corresponding reference Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input 100 0 100 0 Max input of Curve 3 P2 1 08 10 00V Corresponding reference or Max input of Curve 3 100 0 100 0 Min Input of Curve 4 00 00V P2 1 14 Corresponding reference or Min Input of Curve 4 100 0 100 0 Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input P2 1 12 P2 1 16 Corresponding reference Curve 4 Inflection Point Input 100 0 100 0 Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input P2 1 14 P2 1 18 Corresponding reference or Curve 4 Inflection oint 2 Input 100 0 100 0 Max input of Curve 4 P2 1 16 10 00V Corresponding reference or Max input of Curve 4 100 0 100 0 YO FMP Function Terminal 0 Impulse output FMP 1 Open Collector Output YO Highest Frequency of FMP Output 000 01 KHz 100 00KHz Me Xe X Pep Xe e Me Me Pepe Pep Me fe MP Pe Pe Valid Sate of Multi functional Output Terminal 0 Positive Logic 1 Negative Logic YO Hundreds T2 Thousands Expansion Card YO1 Invalid E100 Ten Thousands Expansion Card YO2 Invalid E100 VFI Terminal Function as Digital Input 00 Use as Normal Ana
35. set at P5 0 03 Page 141 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory value P5 0 05 LED Shutdown Display Parameter H 0001 H FFFF H 0033 This function code determines the contents displayed by LED when the frequency inverter is at shutdown state The format for specific display contents is as below Stopping Display Parameter of LED 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L Reference Frequency Hz Bus Voltage V Input Terminal State Output Terminal State VFI Voltage VF Voltage Actual Count Value Actual Length Value m PLC Stage User defined Display Value PID Reference PID Feedback PULSE Impulse Frequency Hz User Standby Monitoring Value 1 Reservation Reservation In shutdown state if the above parameters are required to display the corresponding position is set at 1 after the binary digit is converted into hexadecimal digit it is set at P5 0 05 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P5 0 06 LCD Line 1 Display at Running 0000 9399 9001 P5 0 07 LCD Line 2 Display at Running 0000 9399 9000 P5 0 08 LCD Line 3 Display at Running 0000 9399 9002 P5 0 09 LCD Line 4 Display at Running 0000 9399 9003 The above function codes are used to set the contents displayed by each line when t
36. shall be repaired in China in reference to the bar code date and for exported device not included China shall be repaired at purchase site if the date is within six months after delivery For products manufactured by the Company we will provide paid service for life anytime or anywhere applied it All sale product and agent units of the Company should provide products with after sale service of which service terms include A Provide Class III inspection service at site of the unit Include fault elimination B Refer to after sell service contract concluded between the Company and agents C Request for compensated after sell service from the agent of the Company without reference to guaranteed repair Our Company should take responsibility of guaranteed repair guaranteed exchange and guaranteed return for quality and accident responsibility relating to the product but user could affect insurance for further responsibility compensation guarantee from insurance agent Guarantee term of the product should be effective in 18 months after Bar code date For fault caused in following reason user could obtain compensated maintenance only even guarantee term is effective A Problem caused in incorrect operation based on user s manual or repair modification without authorization B Problem caused in violation of critical requirement C Damage caused in undeserved transportation after purchased D Aging or fault caused in
37. system but if I is too small it may have large overshoot and easily vibrate Generally the proportional gain P is first adjusted so as to increase P as possible under the preconditions of ensuring non vibration of the system and then it is to adjust the integration time I to make the system not only have rapid response property but small overshoot Running Frequency Page 89 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Direct Start P1 0 10 Start Mode 1 Speed Tracking Mode 2 Brake and Restart 0 Direct Start The frequency inverter starts running from start frequency 1 Rotating Speed before Start The frequency inverter shall first judge the rotating speed and direction of the motor and then track down the start frequency of motor the rotating motor smoothly starts without any surge It is applicable for momentary interruption restart of the high inertia loads In order to ensure the performance of rotating speed before start accurate setting of the motor parameters is required 2 Brake before Start First conduct DC braking and them start running from start frequency Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Start from Shutdown Frequency P1 0 11 Speed Tracking Mode 1 Start from Zero Speed 2 Start from Highest Frequency 0 Start from Stop Frequency Track down from the frequency at the moment of stop and adopt this meth
38. than 0 output Signal ON Page 110 Operation Result 4 greater than 2 When the result 4 of the operation module is greater than 0 output Signal ON Function code Function Name Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 33 Analog Output FM1 Reference 00 P2 0 34 Analog Output FM2 Reference P2 0 35 FMP Output Reference Use Terminal YO FMP as FMP i e P2 1 20 0 Function Code P2 0 33 and P2 0 34 respectively define the functions of Analog Output FM1 and FM2 Function Code P2 0 35 defines FMP Impulse Output Function The output range of Analog Output FM1 and FM2 is 0V 10V voltage signal or 0 4mA 20mA current signal The deviation between actual output voltage and target output voltage of the analog output terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 13 P8 1 20 The range of FMP Output Impulse Frequency is 0 01kHz P2 1 21 Highest Frequency of FMP Output P2 1 21 can be set among 0 01kHz 100 00kHz The calibration relation between range of impulse output or analog output and corresponding functions are shown in the table below Set value Function Corresponding Function of Impulse or Analog Output 0 0 100 0 Running Frequency 0 Max Output Frequency Output Current 0 Max Output Frequency Output Torque Absolute Value of Torque 0 2 Times of Rated Current of the Motor Output Torque 0 2 Times of Rat
39. voy that rated voltage of the frequency inverter should conform with voltage level o f AC power supply Otherwise it shall cause hurt to human body or fire accident 3 Do not make supply power of AC loop connect with outputting terminal U V and W The connection will damage converser thus guarantee card should be nonserviceable 4 Only connect it to input power supply after the panel is well installed Do not remove the external lid when it is powered otherwise it may cause electric shock 5 Forbid touching high voltage terminal inside the frequency inverter when it is powered on otherwise there is danger of electric shock 6 Because there is an amount of capacitance stored electric energy inside the frequency inverter maintenance should be implemented at least 10 minutes after the power is off At this time charging indicator should be off thoroughly or positive or negative bus voltage is confirmed to be below 36V otherwise there is danger of electric shock 7 Do not turn on or off line and connector when the circuit is powered on otherwise it can cause hurt to human body 8 Electric elements can be easily damaged by static electricity Do not touch electric elements 9 This frequency inverter should not undergo voltage withstand test which might result in damages to the semiconductor devices in it 10 Before switching on the power supply please put the cover board in position Otherwise e
40. 0 it indicates that the frequency inverter stops freely if it is 1 it indicates that the frequency inverter shuts down in stop mode after fault alarm if it is 2 it indicates that the frequency inverter continues to run at frequency selected by Function Code P6 1 12 after fault alarm Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Running at Current Frequency Continuous Running 1 Running at Reference frequency Frequency Selection 2 Running at Upper Frequency when at Fault 3 Running at Lower Frequency 4 Running at Back Frequency for Abnormality When the frequency inverter breaks down in the running process if the handling mode of this fault is continuous running the frequency inverter displays A A is its fault code it continues to run at frequency selected by P6 1 12 If the handling mode of this fault is shut down by reducing the speed the frequency inverter displays A in the process of deceleration the stop state display Err 0 Run at Current Frequency When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault run at current frequency 1 Run at Reference Frequency When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault run at reference frequency 2 Run at Upper Frequency When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault run at upper frequency 3 Run at Lower Frequency When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault run at lower frequency 4 Run at Standby Frequency for Abnormality When the frequency inver
41. 00 0 100 0 FM2 Output Address 00 0 100 0 indicates 00 0 100 0 FMP Output Address when Terminal YO FMP is used as FMP that is P2 1 20 0 0000H 7FFFH indicates 0 00 100 00 PID Reference Value PID Feedback Value Running status of monitoring frequency inverter 0001H Forward Run 0002H Reverse Run 0003 HStop Page 205 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication Table of Definitions for Non functional Function Code Parameter Address Function Definition Gods Parameter Address Description for Function Monitoring to Fault of Frequency inverter Page 206 No fault Over current at constant speed Over current at acceleration Over current at deceleration Over voltage at constant speed Over voltage at acceleration Over voltage at deceleration Module Fault Undervoltage Frequency inverter Overload Motor Overload Input Default Phase Output Default Phase External Fault Abnormal Communication Frequency inverter Overheat Hardware Fault of Frequency inverter Motor Earthing Short Circuit Motor Motor Identification Error Motor Off load PID Feedback Loss User Defined Fault 1 User Defined Fault 2 Accumulative Power on Time Arrival Accumulative Running Time Arrival Encoder Fault Parameter Re
42. 1 1 1 0 gt Frequency 14 P3 0 31 2 1 1 1 1 gt gt Frequency 15 P3 0 33 7 1 7 Simple PLC E Series Frequency inverter can automatically run at 16 stage speed at most the acceleration and deceleration time and the length of running time of each stage can be set independently refer to Function Code P3 0 03 P3 0 50 Additionally the times of cycle required can be set through P3 0 00 and P3 0 01 Stage 0 Stage 1 Stage 14 Stage 15 Simple PLC p3 0 00 1 Run at P3 0 36 Pots oes gt P3 0 49 gt P3 0 50 gt Run Mode Frequency of P3 0 06 P3 0 32 P3 0 34 P3 0 00 Last Stage i P3 0 02 1 Restart after Run from Power Off requency inverter Start Power Off P3 0 00 2 Continuous Ru P3 0 00 0 Continuous Run False P3 0 00 3 inis P3001 gt N kg NTimes True Free gt Stop Page 165 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 8 Timing Function Function Code Function name Setting Scope Factory Value P3 1 00 Timing Function Selection 0 Invalid 1 Valid 0 Digital Reference P3 1 02 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference Analog input range corresponds to P3 1 02 Tinning Running Time 0000 0min 6500 0min Tinning Running Time Selection E Series Frequency inverter has built i
43. 1 08 Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input P2 1 06 P2 1 10 P2 1 09 Corresponding re Point 2 Input ference for Curve 3 Inflection 100 0 100 0 P2 1 10 Max Input of Curve 3 P2 1 08 10 00V P2 1 11 Corresponding re ference for Max Input of Curve 3 100 0 100 0 The functions and use methods of Curve 3 is roughly the same with Curve 1 and Curve 2 refer to the Description of Curve 1 the difference is that Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship without inflection point but curve 3 is broken line relationship with two inflection point in the middle refer to the Description in the figure below Page 113 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Corresponding Set P2 1 05 VF Input I a 1 li P2 1 04 P2 1 06 P2 1 08 P2 1 10 Function code Function Name Setting scope P2 1 Min Input of Curve 4 00 00V P2 1 14 Corresponding reference for Min Input of Curve 4 Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input P2 1 12 P2 1 16 100 0 100 0 Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input 100 0 100 0 Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input P2 1 14 P2 1 18 Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input 100 0 100 0 Max Input of Curve 4 P2 1 16 10 00V Corresponding reference for Max Input of Curve 4 100 0 100 0 As for the functions and use methods
44. 1 Arrival Set Value 2 Arrival Page 169 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 12 Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function E Series Frequency inverter has five built in virtual Intermediate Delay Relays which not only can collect the physical signals of digital input terminal of the frequency inverter but virtual signals of multi functional output terminals 00 59 And then it is to conduct simple logic running and output the results to multi functional output terminals or equivalent digital input terminal The corresponding digit in Tnput 2 Ten Thousands 3 2 00 is 0 and Thousands of Output Tens and Ones Control Word B of Control Word C Corresponding Digital Input 1 a Input Termina Hundreds and The i Function 00 59 Tens of Control corresponding y digit in intern a Tat nee s input y P3200is1 ediate Delay Time Option for H operati 7 y P3 2 12 HB Valid State operation Ones of Word B Relay ae P3222 Tnput 2 Ten Control Word B P3 2 06 Controlp P3 2 21 P3 2 22 Thousands and 3 2 00 Thousands of The Output Control Word B corresponding Multifunctional Tnput Thousands and digit in Output Terminal hondieds af Comal P3 2 00 is 2 Output corresponding Word C Function 0 59 eetan otn of corresponding multi functional output terminal Description for Control Logic Functi
45. 25 ser Function 25 P7 0 26 ser Function 26 P7 0 27 ser Function 27 P7 0 28 ser Function 28 elclelclelcleleleleleclelclelecleleclelclelclelelelelelelele Xe Xe Xe Me Re e Me Ye Me Ye Pe Me PM e Pe Me Be Be Le e Le De e e e Pe e ew P7 0 29 ser Function 29 Page 69 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 9Group P8 Manufacturer Function Function code Function name Setting scope Group P8 0 Manufacturer Function Group P8 0 00 Manufacturer Code 00000 65535 Sort P8 1 Parameter Correction Sort Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 1 00 00V P8 1 02 Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction Point 1 100 0 100 0 Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 2 P8 1 00 10 00V Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction Point 2 100 0 100 0 Filtering time of potentiometer 00 00s 10 00s VFI actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V VFI indicated voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V VFI actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V VFI indicated voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V VF2 actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V VF2 indicated voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V VF2 actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V VF2 indicated voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V FM target voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V FM1 actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V FM target vol
46. 5 Communication Reference The upper limit frequency is set by the upper computer through communication mode refer to Chapter VIII for more details Page 81 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 Operation Result 1 7 Operation Result 2 8 Operation Result 3 9 Operation Result 4 The upper limit frequency is determined by data after setting calculation of the internal operation module Refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 26 P3 2 39 for more details of the operation module The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9 0 46 P9 0 49 Note the upper limit frequency cannot be set to negative value but if it is the negative value the upper limit frequency is invalid Function Name Setting scope Upper Limit Frequency 000 00 Highest Frequenc Offset 4 a y The set value of this function code is the offset of the upper frequency and the superposition of this offset and upper frequency set by Function Code P0 1 03 is adopted as final set value of upper frequency Function Name Setting scope Keyboard Reference 0 No Memory frequency Shut down 1 Memory Memory Selection 0 No Memory After the frequency inverter stops the reference frequency is reset to the value given by Function Code P0 0 05 and the frequency allowance which is conducted through Key A amp Won the keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN is cleared 1 Memory After the frequency inverter stops the refere
47. Acceleration and PO 1 19 1 Curve S 1 Deceleration Mode 2 Curve S 2 0 Acceleration and Deceleration of the Straight Line The output frequency increases or decreases by the straight line E Series Frequency inverter provides 4 groups of acceleration and deceleration time of the straight line namely P0 0 11 and PO 0 12 PO 1 11 and P0 1 12 P0 1 13 and P0 1 14 and P0 1 15 and P0 1 16 The switch can be selected through different composite state of acceleration and deceleration time selection terminals 1 Curve S 1 The output frequency increases or decreases by Curve S 1 Curve S 1 is used for occasions required for gradual start or stop Parameter P0 1 20 and P0 1 21 respectively defines the time scale of starting point and ending point of Curve S 1 2 Curve S 2 In the Curve S 2 the rated frequency of the motor is always the inflection point of Curve S as shown in the figure below Generally it applies for the occasions that the high speed area above the rated frequency requires to rapidly accelerate and decelerate Page 84 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Output F e tela Cae When the set frequency is below rated frequency the acceleration and deceleration time is as below Set Frequency L t 4 9 X Set Frequency Rated Frequency 2 5 9 XT Rated Frequency Run Time Function code Function Name Setting scope Percentage of Starting PO 1 20 000 0 100 0 Phase of Curve S
48. Failure Keyboard Potentiometer 3 External Terminal VFI Terminal VF2 5 PULS Impulse Reference Multiplex Directive Ter minal Simple PLC Communication Refer ence 10 13 Operation Result Frequency Source A Frequency uency Range Source B PO 1 02 Manufacturer Standby Manufacturer Standby P2 0 00 P2 0 8 19 20 DI1 DH0 Frequency A B PO 0 07 PO 1 00 Frequency A Frequency B Frequency Limit Frequency A B PO 1 03 Target Frequency PO 0 08 PO 0 09 Max ValueA and BI 5 Min ValueA and B Standby Frequency Source 1 Standby Frequency Source 2 Switch of Terminal among the above 8 kinds Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 6 Multi speed Function E Series Frequency inverter can realize the switch of 16 stage speed at most through different combination state of multiplex directive terminal As for missing set digit the calculation is made at state 0 Highest eles Frequency Terminal oe m option combination E 7 P0 0 04 6 Q Multiplex 0 0 0 0 Frequency 0 P3 0 03 PO 1 03 E Dg 0 0 0 1 Frequency 1 P3 0 05 P0 0 08 E directive P0 0 09 5 j 0 0 1 0 Frequency 2 P3 0 07 ae 2 terminal 3 P2 0 00 creer Target E P2 0 09 frequency a 9 10 11 1 1 0 1 Frequency 13 P3 0 29 z 12
49. Frequency inverters Precautions relevant to operation safety are categorized as Warning and attention Potentially dangerous condition which maybe cause severe body injuries or dead if relevant requirement is ignored Warning Potentially dangerous condition which maybe cause middle light injuries or device damage if relevant requirement is ignored it also applies to unsafe operation Attention 1 1 Examination and Acceptance Items to be examined are as follows Items Note Check the Model indicated on the nameplate on 1 Does the model conform to your order one side of the frequency inverter Survey the external appearance of the frequency 2 Is there any damage to the components inverter and make sure that no damage has occurred during transportation Remove the front cover and examine all visible 3 Are th t ly fastened Be trae OO ROTERS POPER JAAS EnS components with appropriate tools 4 Do you have the user s manual the quality Check for the user s manual the quality certificate and the warranty claims form certificate and the warranty claims form If any of the above items is problematic please contact us or our distributors Page 1 Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices 1 2 Precautions for safe operation hs ESD Electro Static Discharge ESD Page 2 1 Installation and maintenance should be performed by professional only 2
50. Level Rated Voltage 2 One phase 220V 50 60Hz T2 Three phase 220V 50 60Hz T4 Three phase 380V 50 60Hz Item Chapter 2 Product Information 2 2 Technical Specifications Specification Control mode V F Control Open loop Vector Control SVC Closed loop Vector Control VC Invalid CDI E100 Series Frequency Resolution Digital 0 02 Analog 0 1 V F curve Linear square root random V F Overload Capability G Model 60s for 150 of the rated current 3s for 180 of the rated current P Model 60s for 120 of the rated current 3s for 150 of the rated current Start Torque G Model 0 5Hz 150 SVC 0Hz 180 VC P Model 0 5Hz 100 Speed Regulation Range 1 100 SVC 1 1000 VC Stable Speed Accuracy 0 5 SVC 0 02 VC Torque Control Accuracy 5 VC Torque Compensation Manual torque compensation 0 1 30 0 automatic torque compensation Operating mode Keyboard terminal RS485 communication Frequency Source 14 kinds of main frequency sources and 14 kinds of auxiliary sources Adopt various combination modes to switch Diversification to Each Frequency Source Input Mode keyboard potentiometer external analog digital reference impulse reference Multiplex Directive simple PLC communication arithmetic results etc Torque Source 14 kinds of Torque Sources including digital reference external analog impuls
51. Maximum Input of PULS 100 0 100 0 P2 0 27 PULS Filtering time 00 00s 10 00s X Xai Dol DS a Dol Xl ID I Dol ID XD Xd Dl I S Dl P2 0 28 Expansion Card YO1 Function Selection O No Function 1 Frequency inverter under Running 2 Fault Stop Output P2 0 29 T1 Relay Selection Function 3 Frequency Level Testing FDT1 Output 4 Frequency Arrival 5 Zero speed Running no output when shut down P2 0 30 T2 Relay Selection Function 6 Motor Overload Pre alarm 7 Frequency inverter Overload Pre alarm 8 Reference Count Value Arrival P2 0 31 Expansion Card YO2 i Function Selection 9 Designated Count Value Arrival 10 Length Arrival PLC circulation cycle completed 12 Accumulative Running Time Arrival YO Function Selection Use Terminal YO FMP as YO i e P2 1 20 1 13 Frequency Limit 14 Torque Limit 15 Ready for Running 16 VFI gt VF2 17 Upper Frequency Arrival Page 49 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Page 50 18 Lower Frequency Arrival no output when shut down 19 Undervoltage state output 20 Communication Reference 21 VF1 Output less than Lower Limit 22 VF1 Output more Upper Limit 23 Zero speed Running 2 also output when shut down 24 Accumulative Power on Time Arrival 25 Frequency Level Testing FDT2 Output 26 Frequ
52. Multiplex Directive 14 Multiplex Directive 15 Explanation when the multiplex directive corresponds to frequency the corresponding parameter is the percentage relative to highest frequency When the multiplex directive corresponds to torque the corresponding parameter is the percentage relative to digital reference torque When the multiplex directive corresponds PID the corresponding parameter is the percentage relative to PID Reference Feedback range Appendix 2 Description for Functions of Frequency Source Selection Terminals Frequency source A correspond to P0 1 00 0 Frequency source B correspond to PO 1 00 1 Frequency source A B correspond to PO 1 00 2 Frequency source A B correspond to P0 1 00 3 Max value of A amp B correspond to P0 1 00 4 Min value of A amp B correspond to PO 1 00 5 Backup frequency source 1 correspond to PO 1 00 6 Backup frequency source 2 correspond to PO 1 00 7 Page 104 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Appendix 3 Description for Functions of Acceleration and Deceleration Time Selection Terminals Option of acceleration deceleration time Corresponding parameters Acceleration deceleration time 1 PO 0 11 PO 0 12 Acceleration deceleration time 2 PO 0 11 PO 0 12 Acceleration deceleration time 3 PO 1 13 PO 1 14 Acceleration deceleration time 4 PO 1 15 PO 1 16 Appendix 4 Description for Funct
53. Output Relay 1 e Q T1B The default is the running signal Upper Frequency 3 eao pia Refi N ee e O Tic Reference parameters P2 0 29 Upper Frequency 4 DIS Common Terminal COM m Q T2A_ Multi functional Output Relay 2 Pressure signal A vet eO 128 The default is fault indication 0 10V 4 20mA ly GND pF t2c Reference parameters P2 0 30 x u Current signal AO vF2 ve i I vF2 21 o 10v 4 20m H GND 1 U at Note if the analog input is 0 10V the voltage signal will put J5 1 and J5 2 VFI and VF2 Dial Switch to U side if the analog input is 4 20mA the current signal will put J5 1 and J5 2 to I side If the analog input is Current Signal 0 1A it is required to add Expansion Card E180 ZS and convert the current signal to voltage signal 0 10V Refer toAppendix 6 for use of Expansion Card E180 ZS Connection Method of Main Circuit for Energy Saving Modification of Injection Molding Machine For injection molding machine with direct starting and stopping oil pump motor see circuit as following Circuit gt Frequency Electromagnetic Oil P Mot Breaker _ inverter gt Switch p0Oil Pump Motor The power supply cable is the lead taken behind the breaker is connected to the power supply incoming end of the frequency inverter during modification the incoming terminal of the Electromagnetic Switch is connected to output end of the frequency inverter For injecti
54. P0 0 11 and P0 0 12 refer to the Description of P0 0 11 and P0 0 12 for more details E Series Frequency inverter totally provides 4 groups of acceleration and deceleration time of the straight line which can switch among 4 groups of acceleration and deceleration time through different composite state of acceleration and deceleration time selection terminals It can set 2 acceleration and deceleration time selection terminals terminal function 16 17 refer to the Description of Code P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for Acceleration and Deceleration Time Selection Terminal Function of Function for more details Function code Function Name Setting scope Frequency Switch Point PO 1 17 between Acceleration time 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 1 and Acceleration time 2 Frequency Switch Point between Deceleration time 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 1 and Deceleration time 2 The function codes above are adopted to set the frequency of the switch point of acceleration and deceleration time 1 and acceleration and deceleration time 2 When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is less than the set value of these two function codes the acceleration and deceleration time 2 is adopted otherwise the acceleration and deceleration time 1 is adopted Note when using this function the acceleration and deceleration time 1 and acceleration and deceleration time 2 cannot be set to 0s Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Straight Line
55. Page 216 Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts The formula for simple calculation for brake unit and brake resistance is as below Generally the brake current is 1 2 I of the rated current of the motor the generated brake torque is approximately equal to the rate torque of the motor Therefore proper brake current IB shall be selected based on requirements of load inertia and shutdown time The greater the load inertia is the shorter the shutdown time requires and the greater the selected brake current IB is IB 1 2 3 2 I According to brake current the value of resistance to brake unit and brake resistance can be selected The peak current of the brake unit only aim at brake unit of Delixi is larger than IB Size of Brake Resistance Value RB U IB in S2 and T2 Series U takes 400V in T4 Series U takes700V Size of Brake Resistance Power PB K U U RB In formula K indicates braking coefficient with range of 0 1 0 5 and the braking coefficient shall be selected based on requirements of load inertia and shutdown time The greater the load inertia is the shorter the shutdown time requires and the greater the selected braking coefficient K is General load can select 0 1 0 2 and the large load inertia selects 0 5 The following sizing table is available when ID is approximately equal to 1 21 and K is between 0 1 0 2 The greater the load inertia is the shorter the shutdown time requires and proper adjustmen
56. Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 12 UP DOWN Terminal Change Rate 00 001Hz s 65 535Hz s 01 000 The function code defines that when Terminal UP DOWN is used to regulate the reference frequency set the rate of frequency variation When P0 2 04 Decimal Point of Frequency is 2 the value range is 00 001Hz s 65 535Hz s When P0 2 04 Decimal Point of Frequency is 1 the value range is 000 01Hz s 655 35Hz s Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 13 Minimum Input of Curve 1 00 00V P2 0 15 00 00 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of Curve 1 P2 0 15 Maximum Input of Curve 1 P2 0 13 10 00V 10 00 P2 0 14 100 0 100 0 000 0 Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of Curve 1 P2 0 16 100 0 100 0 100 0 P2 0 17 VFI Filtering time 00 00s 10 00s 00 10 The above function codes are used to set the relation between analog input and corresponding reference value that is straight line relationship When the voltage of analog input is greater than the given Max Input of Curve 1 P2 0 15 the analog is calculated at Max Input of Curve 1 similarly when the voltage of analog input is lower than the given Min Input of Curve 1 P2 0 13 the calculation shall be at min input or 0 0 according to the setting of Curve below Mix Input Reference Selection VFI Input Filtering time is used to set the software fil
57. Running 2 also output when shut down When the output frequency of the frequency inverter is OHZ output Signal ON In Stop Mode this signal is ON Accumulative Power on Time Arrival When the accumulative power on time of the frequency inverter reaches the time set by Function Code P2 2 00 output Signal ON Frequency Level Testing FDT2 Output Refer to P2 2 06 he Description of Function Code P2 2 05 and Frequency 1 Arrival Output Refer to P2 2 08 he Description of Function Code P2 2 07 and Frequency 2 Arrival Output Refer to the Description of Function Code P2 2 09 and P2 2 10 Current 1 Arrival Output Refer to P2 2 16 he Description of Function Code P2 2 15 and Current 2 Arrival Output Refer to P2 2 18 he Description of Function Code P2 2 17 and Timing Arrival Output When the timing function selection P3 1 00 1 is valid this running time reaches the given timing time the frequency inverter automatically shuts down output Signal ON in the process of shutdown and stop VFI Input Overlimit When the value of the analog input is greater than the value Upper Limit of VF1 Input set by Function Code P2 2 20 or less than the value Lower Limit of VF1 Input set by Function Code P2 2 19 output Signal ON In Off load In off load state the frequency inverter outputs Signal ON In Reverse Running In reverse running state the frequency inve
58. Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 29 Phase Directive 13 100 0 100 0 P3 0 30 Phase 13 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 31 Phase Directive 14 100 0 100 0 P3 0 32 Phase 14 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 33 Phase Directive 15 100 0 100 0 P3 0 34 Phase 16 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s When the tens for each phase property of the multiplex directive is 0 the corresponding reference value of Simple PLC Running and each phase of the multiplex directive are the percentage relative to the highest frequency The phase running time is the duration of PLC running at the frequency of each phase including acceleration and deceleration time and FWD and REV Dead Time Page 123 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope P3 0 35 Phase 0 Attribution Ones Acceleration amp Deceleration Time P3 0 36 Phase 1 Attribution Selection Invalid Multiplex Directive P3 0 37 Phase 2 Attribution 0 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 1 P3038 Phase JAA 1 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 2 Zi aS Eoun 2 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 3 P3 0 39 Phase 4 Attribution 3 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 4 P3 0 40 Phase 5 Attribution Tens Frequency Source Selection Valid P3 0 41 Phase 6 Attribution Multiplex Directive P30 42 Phase 7 Attribution Current Phase Directive P3 0 43 Phas
59. Setting scope Fault Protective Action Selection 1 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Motor Overload Tens Input Default Phase Hundreds Output Default Phase Thousands External Default Ten Thousands Communication Abnormality Fault Protective Action Selection 2 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Motor Overload Tens Feedback Loss Hundreds User Customerized Fault 1 Thousands User Customerized Fault 2 Ten Thousands Power on Time Arrival Fault Protective Action Selection 3 Ones Running Time Arrival 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Tens Encoder Abnormality 0 Free Stop Hundreds Parameter Read Write Abnormity 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode Thousands Motor Overhear 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ten Thousands Fault of 24V Power Supply 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode Fault Protective Action Selection 4 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Larger Speed Deviation Tens Motor Overspeed Hundreds Initial Position Error Thousands Reservation Ten Thousands Reservation Page 149 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters The above function codes are used to set the actions of the frequency inverter after fault alarm Each digit among the options for fault protection action corresponds to a kind of fault protection if it is
60. Setting scope P5 0 04 Automatic Time Switch of LED Running Display Parameter 000 0 No Switch 000 1s 100 0s LED Stop Display Parameter H 0001 H FFFF Bit00 Reference frequency Hz Bit01 Bus Voltage V Bit02 Input Terminal State Bit03 Output Terminal State Bit04 VF1 Voltage V Bit05 VF2 Voltage V Bit06 Actual Count Value Bit07 Actual Length Value Bit08 PLC Phase Bit09 Customized Display Value Bit10 PID Reference Bit11 PID Feedback Bit12 Impulse frequency Hz Bit13 User Standby Monitoring Value 1 Bit14 Reservation Bit15 Reservation LCD Line 1 Display at Running 0000 9399 LCD Line 2 Display at Running 0000 9399 LCD Line 3 Display at Running 0000 9399 LCD Line 4 Display at Running 0000 9399 LCD Line 1 Display at Stop 0000 9399 LCD Line 2 Display at Stop 0000 9399 LCD Line 3 Display at Stop 0000 9399 LCD Line 4 Display at Stop 0000 9399 LCD Chinese English Display Switch 0 Chinese 1 English Customized Display of Coefficient 0 0001 6 5000 Se oe oe Pe e Oe oe Customized Display of Decimal Point 0 0 digit Decimal Point 1 1 digit Decimal Point 2 2 digit Decimal Point 3 3 digit Decimal Point Xe Page 63 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Selection Display of Function Par
61. Signal Positive Encoder Z Signal Negative Encoder Z Signal Externally provide Power 5V and Max output current is 100mA Power Ground Definition for E180 PG2 Wiring Terminal Signal Name of Terminal Description A Positive Encoder A Signal A Negative Encoder A Signal Positive Encoder B Signal Negative Encoder B Signal Positive Encoder Z Signal Negative Encoder Z Signal Positive Encoder U Signal Negative Encoder U Signal Positive Encoder V Signal Negative Encoder V Signal Positive Encoder W Signal Negative Encoder W Signal Externally provide Power 5V and Max output current is 100mA Power Ground Wiring Terminal Signal Description Encoder A signal Encoder B signal Encoder Z signal Externally provide Power 24V and Max output current is 100mA Page 222 Power Ground Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communication Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communication 1 Introduction For CDI E180 Series and E102 are not configured with communication function if communication required the expansion card for communication needs to be added Specific types are as below Type Name Description SG Positive Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication SG Negative Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication Support MODBUS RTU Protocol Expansion Card for E180 E180 485 en Communication
62. Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Feedback channel 0 VFI correspond to P4 0 02 0 0 VF2 correspond to P4 0 02 1 VF1 VF2 correspond to P4 0 02 2 VF1 VF2 correspond to P4 0 02 3 PULS reference correspond to P4 0 02 4 Communication Reference correspond to P4 0 02 5 MAX VF1 VF2 correspond to P4 0 02 6 MIN VF1 VF2 correspond to P4 0 02 7 Page 135 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 9 Operation Result 1 10 Operation Result 2 11 Operation Result 3 12 Operation Result 4 PID Reference Value is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation module Refer to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 26 P3 2 39 for more details of the operation module The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9 0 46 P9 0 49 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 03 PID Action Direction 0 Direct Action 1 Reverse Action 0 This function code is used to set the change conditions of the frequency with the feedback quantity 0 Direct Action The output frequency of the frequency inverter is in proportion to its feedback quantity when the feedback quantity is less than the given quantity the output frequency of the frequency inverter rises to make the feedback quantity rise accordingly and final feedback quantity equal to the given quantity 1 Reverse Action The output frequency of the frequency in
63. _ nie DC48V 50mA Common Terminal CON Digital Signal J EMBL et 2 Common Terminal COM Impulse Output s 0 01KHz 100 00KHz External Potentiometer Tia aK F iani _OKVAW 10V poroen Relay Output 1 PPly TIB AC 250V 3A below lt ___ Ovfl Analog Signal Input 1 DC 30V 3A below TICO Vvf2 Analog Signal Input 2 GND Analog Signal Ground T2A Relay Output 1 T2B AC 250V 3A below DC 30V 3A below PG Expansion MCO Card Interface Digital signal power P24V supply can externally provide 24V power COM supply and has Max Current of 300mA Page 25 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 4 2 Function of control circuit terminal Following sheet summarize function of control circuit terminal which is connected according to function respectively Category Terminal Name of Terminal Description of Function Take P24V short circuit by factory default When adopting external power to OP External Power Input drive the digital input terminal disconnect OP and P24V and connect with external power DH OP Digital Input 1 Terminals are equipped on E Series DI2 OP Digital Input 2 Control Panel in which Terminal D16 can Digital DI3 OP Digital Input 3 be used for high speed Impulse Input and Input DI4 OP Digital Input 4 has maximum input frequency of 100kHz Terminal DI5 OP Digit
64. a impulse signal with width of 200ms If Input 1 Rising Edge is true the logic result is true after keeping it 200ms the logic result becomes false Input 1 Rise Edge and If Input 1 Rising Edge and Input 2 Rising Input 2 AND Edge are true the logic result is true or false e g in case of setting Function Code P3 2 00 Intermediate Delay Relay Control 00112 we can learn from referring to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 00 that Relay 5 M5 amp Relay 5 M5 are determined by Control WordA and Relay 3 M3 amp Relay 2 M2 are determined by Control Word B and Relay 1 M1 is determined by thousands and hundreds of Control Word C as shown in the figure below 00 112 Corresponding M5 is N T Corresponding M2 is controlled by controlled by Control Word A thousands and hundreds of Control Corresponding M4 is Word C controlled by Control Word A Corresponding M1 is controlled by Corresponding M3 is Control Word B controlled by Control Word B In combination with the example above in case of setting P3 2 01 Intermediate Delay Relay Control Word A 10111 it is to compulsively set M5 1 and M4 0 For M3 M2 and M1 are not determined by Control Word A so the setting of P3 2 01 to M3 M2 and M1 is invalid 1014141 Corresponding MS is A compulsively set at 1 Invalid Corresponding M4 is compulsively set at 0 Page 171 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case In combination with th
65. alarm of Fault Err23 If the setting is 0 the accumulative power on time is not limited Actually accumulative power on time can be viewed through Function Code P5 1 01 Note Only when actually accumulative power on time P5 1 01 is less than the value set by Function Code P2 2 00 the frequency inverter can enter into normal running if the setting is 0 the accumulative power on time is not limited Setting scope Oh 65000h 00000 Function code Function Name Factory Value P2 2 01 Accumulative Running Arrival Time Reference This function code is used to set accumulative running time of the frequency inverter When actually accumulative running time reaches the value set by Function Code P2 2 01 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON and the frequency inverter shuts down automatically The corresponding function of multi functional output terminals is accumulative running time arrival 12 The frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err24 Actually accumulative running time can be viewed through Function Code P5 1 00 Note Only when actually accumulative running time P5 1 00 is less than the value set by Function Code P2 2 01 the frequency inverter can enter into normal running if the setting is 0 the accumulative running time is not limited Page 116 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 02 Detected Reference f
66. bad environment E Damage caused in earthquake fire disaster lightning strike abnormal voltage or other natural disaster and incidental disaster F Damage occurs in transportation Note transportation mode should be appointed by user of themselves the Company should assist agent to conduct transfer of goods G Brand trade mark SN nameplate marked by manufacturer is damaged or unjustifiable H Failure to pay off fund according to purchase contract I Failure to describe actual conditions relating to installation distribution operation maintenance or other condition to the Company The Company should carry out responsibility of Three guarantee abovementioned only after received the returned goods and confirmed responsibility attribution Page 13 Chapter 2 Product Information Should it involve an unpaid or untimely settlement due to the buyer the ownership hereof still belongs to the supplier In addition the latter will assume no liability her einabove and the buyer shall have no disagreement All relevant service fees shall be calculated in accordance with the identical standards of the factory In the event that an agreement or a contract exist its priority shall be performed Page 14 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 1 Option of the Site and Space for Installation Option of installi
67. by P3 2 25 Timing Unit Ten Thousands of 2 When the signal of the output terminal of the timer terminal function 48 49 is valid the timer starts timing When the signal of the input terminal of the timer is invalid the timer stops timing and keeps current value When actual timing value of Timer reaches the value set by P3 2 24 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is the Timer 1 Time Arrival 42 When actual timing value of Timer 2 reaches the value set by P3 2 25 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is the Timer 2 Time Arrival 43 When actual timing value of Timer 1 reaches the value set by P3 2 24 but actual timing value of Timer 2 fails to reach the value set by P3 2 25 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON When actual timing value of Timer 2 reaches the value set by P3 2 25 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is Timer 1 Time Arrival but Timer 2 Time Non Arrival 44 In the process of timing the reset operation to actual timing value can be realized through digital input terminal Corresponding digital input terminal function is the Timer Reset Terminal 50 51
68. can be used simultaneously alternating current reactors which is effective in reducing higher order harmonic input CDI E100 Series is DC free electric reactor In CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter the types with powerl1kW above can be configured with DC reactor Table of Matching Direct Current Reactors T4S eries Inductance uH Power KW Inductance uH 1500 37 55 300 600 75 90 200 Page 215 Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts A2 3 Radio noise filter Radio noise filters are used to restrain the transmission of electromagnetic interfering noises generated by the frequency inverter They can also be used to restrain interference with the motor from external radio instantaneous impact and surges Table of matching 3 phase 3 wire Radio Noise Filters Key filter parameters Common mode Derivation mode Filter model input loss dB input loss dB 0 1 1 30 0 1 1 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz DL 5EBT1 75 85 33 59 80 60 Voltage v DL 10EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60 DL 20EBT1 70 85 59 45 80 60 DL 35EBT1 70 85 50 40 80 60 DL 50EBT1 65 85 50 40 80 50 DL 80EBT1 50 75 45 60 80 50 DL 100EBK1 50 70 50 60 80 50 DL 150EBK1 50 70 50 60 70 50 In situations requiring stronger anti radio interference capability or conformity to CE UL or CSA standards or when there are de
69. can be used to suppress the high order harmonic of the input current from the frequency inverter thus improve its power factors It is recommended for the following situations 1 The ratio of the capacity of the power source to that of the frequency inverter exceeds 10 1 2 Silicon controlled load or power factor compensation devices with switch control is wired to the same power supply 3 The 3 phase power has a high degree of voltage unbalance 3 Table of Matching Alternating Current Reactors 2 T2 Series Power kW Current A Inductance mH Power kW Current A Inductance mH 0 4 2 0 4 6 2 2 1 0 0 75 4 0 2 4 E 0 6 1 5 7 0 1 6 T4S eries Power kW Current A Inductance mH Power kW Current A Inductance mH 0 75 2 3 7 6 18 5 37 0 5 1 5 3 7 4 8 22 45 0 42 2 2 5 0 3 2 30 60 0 32 3 7 8 8 2 0 37 75 0 26 55 13 1 5 45 90 0 21 T3 17 1 2 55 0 18 11 25 0 8 T3 152 0 13 15 32 A2 2 DC reactor When the capacity of the power grid far exceeds that of the frequency inverter or when the power capacity is beyond 1000KVA or when the user expects greatly improved power factor of the power wit 0 6 supply direct current reactors will be necessary Direct current reactors
70. ccs cee cee neces cee 32 ADD Testiran seisi sncsenssensncnaccessacveaneseasssssesve sh sunanaieeswenses sosencsecsonsen aiias 4 2 3 Operating inspection 1ee eee cee cee eee cette tenets eee ee cee enr cee eee eee tee teen eee 11133 4 3 Operating method of keyboard 711 4 3 1 Keys on keyboard and their functions IPTC eT Tere Tee ee Tee eee eee eee eee eee 0033 4 3 2 Data Monitoring Moderrrrsrcttcsr csr rss sss ceesss cesses ceeceecesceessscccccsccececssscesces see 3G 4 3 3 Use of Multi Function Key a Ronee eer 4 3 4 Parameter check and set methods using digital keyboard str eter teeter eee 39 44 Function Code Display Mode POPETITTTCTIRITESTETISTI PITT TIPS IETTE TTT TITIT TTT TIT eT Tr ere 40 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters PYUSTTETIOTIUTICTTCILOTT TOTTI SITET TTT TTT TEST T ISITE Te TT 4l 5 1 PO Group Basic Function Content 5 2 Group P1 Motor Control Parameter eer rere ereereerr ere eer er rerrerre reer reer err ere eee ere ree ree re 45 5 3 Group P2 7 Input Output Terminal Function ERT EET ITEC Teer e eee Tee eee reer rere er rere err err erry 47 5 4 Group P3 Programmable Function 5 5 Group P4 Pid Control And Communication Control s s srtrr srr ttr terete see seeeee see 260 5 6 Group P5 Keyboard Display restos st cose setene nse tetas nese seen e ee een nee cee eee cece ene cee eee HD 5 7 Group P6 Fault Display and Protections str ctt c
71. computer through communication mode have been too much so the use of Network RS485 can conduct communication with E Series Frequency inverter of Delixi CDI E100 Series Frequency inverter has communication interface terminal on control panel that is SG and SG so the communication can be realized by connecting the communication line and programming on upper computer While E180 Series Frequency inverter hasn t had communication interface terminal on control panel so the communication can be realized by externally connecting the expansion card and programming on upper computer E Series Frequency inverter adopts MODBUS RTU Protocol which can only be used as slave station namely it can only handle and reply the data from upper computer but not initiatively send the data When communicating it is required to set the parameters of Function Code P4 1 00 P4 1 05 These parameters need to be set based on actual conditions if the setting is improper it may cause the communication unable to be done or abnormal communication When the communication timeout P4 1 04 is set at non zero data the frequency inverter automatically shuts down after the fault of communication timeout to avoid the frequency inverter from running without control to lead to adverse consequence when the communication or upper computer breaks down As for specific use of Communication Protocol refer to the Description of Chapter VIII for more details The figures below are communic
72. control 1 Keyboard Control Set P0 0 03 0 Press RUN Key on the keyboard the frequency inverter starts press Stop Key on the keyboard the frequency inverter stops the running direction is controlled by Function Code P0 0 06 it is forward rotation when at P0 0 06 0 and it is reverse rotation when at P0 0 06 1 2 Terminal Control Set P0 0 03 1 Provide four kinds of terminal start and stop modes for option of the users two line mode 1 two line mode 2 three line mode 1 and three line mode 2 Specific use methods are as below Two line Mode 1 Set P2 0 11 0 Any two terminals of DIx and Dly among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse running of the more and all are the active level The terminal function references are as below Reference Value Description 1 Forward Running FWD 2 Reverse Running REV K1 K2 C mand KI 0 0 Stop DI K2 E Series 0 1 REV DIy Frequency inverter 1 0 FWD COM 1 1 Stop Page 158 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Two line Mode 2 Set P2 0 11 1 Any two terminals of DIx and Dly among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse running of the motor in which Terminal DIx is used as running enable terminal and Dly is used as terminal of confirming the running direction all are the active level The terminal function references are as below
73. devices If connection line between the frequency inverter and the motor is too long carrier frequency of the frequency inverter can be reduced as below The carrier frequency can be given by Function Code P1 0 22 Table of wire distance between the frequency inverter and the motor Wire distance between the frequency arrier frequency P inverter and the motor G q y P Not exceeding 50m 1OKHz or lower Not exceeding 100m 5KHz or lower Beyond 100m 3KHz or lower Output reactors should be installed when the wire distance exceeds 50 meters Otherwise the motor may get burnt down External thermal relays may cause unnecessary operations due to the Highest Frequency current from the distributed capacitance in the output lines of the frequency inverter As far as Low capacity models of the 400V Series especially those below 7 5KW is concerned the ratio of their current to the rated current of the frequency inverter will become bigger if their wiring lines are rather long over 50m As a result external thermal relays may carry out unnecessary operations Page 22 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 3 4 Wiring and Supporting Peripherals for Main Circuits 1 CDI E100 Series Type of Frequency inverter Main Circuit Wire Gage mm2 Control Circuit Wire Gage mm2 Use free air breaker MCCB A Electromagnetic contactorMC A S2 Sin gle Phase 220V O
74. disconnection is invalid Active Low Level the connection of VF and 10V is valid but disconnection is invalid Page 115 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope P2 1 26 DII Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 27 DI2 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 28 DI3 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s The above functions are used to set the delayed time arising from the impact of the signal on frequency inverter when changes occur in signal DI1 DI2 and Di3 Function code Function Name Setting scope P2 1 29 YO Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 30 T1 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 31 T2 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s The above function codes are used to set the delayed time of the frequency inverter from generating signal YO T1 and T2 to output signal YO T1 andT2 Group P2 2 Auxiliary Group Setting scope Oh 65000h 00000 Function code Function Name Factory Value P2 2 00 Accumulative Power on Arrival Time Reference This function code is used to set accumulative power on time of the frequency inverter from the date of leaving the factory When actually accumulative power on time reaches the value set by Function Code P2 2 00 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON The corresponding function of multi functional output terminals is accumulative power on time arrival 24 The frequency inverter gives an
75. inverter and its line fault When the frequency inverter Electromagnetic breaks down cut off main power Contactor MC supply and prevent restart after power off and fault AC Reactor ACL Be used for improving input power factor reduce upper harmonics and restrain the power surge Radio Noise Filter NF Be used for reducing radio noise filter of the frequency inverter E Series B Frequency inverter P Regenerative Brake Unit Ub Regenerative Brake Resistance Rb When the brake torque is unable to meet the requirements this is selected and used for occasions with large inertia load or frequent brake or rapid stop CDI E100 Series has built in brake unit Built in brake unit for CDI E180 Series with power below 15Kw DC Reactor DCL Be used for improving power factor and restraining current peak E100 has no this connection terminal Radio Noise Filter NF Be used for reducing radio noise filter of the frequency inverter Page 17 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 3 Wiring of the main circuit 3 3 1 Wiring diagram for the main circuit and precautions This section describes connection of main circuit of E frequency inverters 1 Do not make power supply of AC main loop connect with output terminal U V and W 2 Please connect unit only after shut down the power supply
76. is as below Running Display Parameter 1 of LED 0 Running Frequency Hz Set Frequency Hz Output Current A Output Voltage V Bus Voltage V Output Torque Output Power kW Output Terminal State Input Terminal State VFI Voltage V VF2 Voltage V Customized Display Value Actual counting value m PID Set PID Feedback In operation if it is required to display each parameter above set corresponding position to 1 after transfer binary system to hexadecimal system set at P5 0 02 Running Display Parameter 2 of LED 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PULSE Impulse Frequency kHz Feedback Speed Hz PIC Stage A Voltage before VF1 Correction V Voltage before VF2Correction V Line Speed m min Current Power on Time min Current Running Time min Residual Running Time min Frequency Source A Hz Frequency Source B Hz Communication Setting Value PULSE Impulse Frequency Hz Encoder Feedback Speed Hz Actual Speed Value User Standby Monitoring Value 1 In operation if it is required to display each parameter above set corresponding position to 1 after transfer binary system to hexadecimal system
77. is conducted based on fault protection action mode Setting scope 0 0 50 0 maximum frequency Function code Function Name Factory Value Speed Deviation greater than Detection Value Speed Deviation greater than Detection Time P6 1 23 20 0 P6 1 24 0 0s 60 0s 05 0 This function is only valid when the frequency inverter runs with speed sensor vector control When the frequency inverter detects out the deviation between actual speed of the motor and reference frequency if the deviation value is greater than detection value P6 1 23 of excessive speed deviation and the duration is longer than detection time P6 1 24 of excessive speed deviation the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err28 and the handling to fault is conducted based on fault protection action mode When the detection time of excessive speed deviation is 0 0s this function is invalid Setting scope Function Name Factory Value Fault Output Terminal Action Selection 0 No Action during Fault Auto Reset Period 1 Action Function code P6 1 25 0 This function code is used to set whether the fault output terminals act during the period of automatic fault reset When at P6 1 25 0 the fault output terminals cannot act during the period of automatic fault reset When at P6 1 25 1 the fault output terminals act during the period of automatic fault reset After automatic fault reset the fault output terminals also reset
78. jogging When the frequency inverter stops it can use Dix and Dly to realize Jogging Function and the jogging running frequency and acceleration and deceleration time can be set through Function Code PO 1 08 P0 1 10 Note The jogging function of the above reference modes is the jogging effect when the frequency inverter is at stop state If the frequency inverter is required to be at running state and the priority is given to the effect of Jogging Function it is to set Function Code P0 1 25 1 7 1 5 Running Frequency Control E Series Frequency inverter provides two Frequency Source Input Channels that is Frequency Source A and Frequency Source B respectively they not only can work independently but in combination mode through computer Each frequency source has 14 kinds of references for option so the optional requirements for different frequencies at different sites can be greatly satisfied The factory default of the frequency inverter is Frequency Source A Reference When two frequency sources are combined Frequency Source A is main channel and Frequency Source B is auxiliary channel by default Detailed explanation for realization process of frequency selection is shown as the figure below Page 163 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Keybaord V A on Increase and Decrease Frequency or UP DOWN Terminal on PO 0 05 Increase and Decrease Frequency Failure Keyboard Potentiometer Cuver 1 P2 0 13 P
79. manufacturer the users don t operate it P8 1 Correction Group Function code Function Name Setting scope P8 1 00 Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 1 00 00V P8 1 02 Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction Point 1 P8 1 02 Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 2 P8 1 00 10 00V P8 1 01 100 0 100 0 Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction Point 2 P8 1 04 Filtering time of potentiometer 00 00s 10 00s P8 1 03 100 0 100 0 The function codes of this group are used to correct the potentiometer to get rid of the impact of zero offset or voltage attenuation caused by overlong keyboard lines When leaving the factory the function parameters of this group have been corrected when resetting to factory value the reset value is the value after factory correction Generally the application site is not required to conduct correction Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P8 1 05 VFI actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 06 VFI indicated voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 07 VFI actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 08 VFI indicated voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 09 VF2 actual voltage 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 10 VF2 indicated voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 11 VF2 actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 12 VF2 indicated voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 The function codes of this group a
80. maximum value between Frequency Source A and B 5 Min Value ofA amp B The reference frequency is determined by the minimum value between Frequency Source A and B Page 79 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 Standby Frequency Source 1 7 Standby Frequency Source 2 Standby Frequency Source 1 and Standby Frequency Source 2 are reserved by the manufacturer as frequency sources used for special occasions in future so the users may ignore them as usual 8 Switch of Terminal among the above 8 kinds The reference frequency is switched among the above 8 kinds of frequency sources by selecting different composite state of the terminals E Series Frequency inverter can set 3 kinds of frequency sources to choose the terminals Terminal Function 18 20 refer to the instruction for Terminal Selection Function of Frequency Source P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details Function Name Setting scope 0 Keyboard Reference No Power off Memory 1 Keyboard Reference Power off Memory Keyboard Potentiometer Reference External Terminal VF1 Reference External Terminal VF2 Reference PULS Reference DI6 Multiplex Directive Reference Simple PLC Reference PID Control Reference Communication Reference 10 Operation Result 1 11 Operation Result 2 12 Operation Result 3 13 Operation Result 4 Option of Frequency Source B OMAN NHNN FW WN This function case has the same function with Option
81. name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Prohibition 1 Curve 1 2 Curve 2 3 Curve 3 P1 0 24 Motor Overload Protection Motor Overload Protection Level Motor Overload Alarm System 050 100 00 20 10 00 When at 1 0 24 0 the frequency inverter hasn t had overload protection function to the motor it suggests heating the relay between frequency inverter and motor When at P1 0 24 1 2 or 3 the frequency inverter shall judge whether the motor is overload or not based on inverse time characteristic curve of the overload protection of the motor The users need to correctly set the value of P1 0 25 based on actual overload capability and load conditions of the motor if the set value is too small it is easy to report the motor overload fault Errl0 while the set value is too large the motor may have the risk of being burnt especially for the conditions that the rated current of the frequency inverter is larger than the rated current of the motor When at P1 0 25 01 00 it means that the motor overload protection level is 100 rated current of the motor Function Code P1 0 26 is used to define when the early alarm is given before overload fault protection of the motor The larger the value is the smaller the early alarm lead is When the accumulative output current of the frequency inverter is larger than product of multiplying overload inverse time curve by P1 0 26 the multi functional output terminal of the freque
82. number Input B of Operation 2 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 1 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Setting Coefficient of Operation 2 00000 65535 The above function codes are used to set the input address and setting coefficient of Operation 2 Refer to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 28 P3 2 30 for more details Page 131 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Input A of Operation 3 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 3 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Input B of Operation 3 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 3 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number The above function codes are used to set the input address and setting coefficient of Operation 3 Setting Coefficient of Operation 3 00000 65535 Refer to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 28 P3 2 30 for more details Function code Function name Setting scope Input A of Operation 4 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Oper
83. of Curve 4 refer to the Description of Curve 3 Function code Function name Setting scope 0 Impulse output FMP 1 Open Collector Output YO P2 1 20 YO FMP Terminal Function This function code is used to define that the Terminal YO FMP is used as impulse output function or open collector function Tf it is used as impulse output i e P2 1 20 0 specific function refers to the Description for Function Code P2 0 35 and the high frequency of the output impulse is determined by the set value of Function Code P2 1 21 at the moment If it is used as open collector function i e P2 1 20 1 specific function refers to the Description for Function Code P2 0 32 Function code Function name Setting scope P2 1 21 Highest Frequency of FMP Output 000 01kHz 100 00kHz This function code is used to set the highest frequency of output impulse when Terminal YO FMP is used as impulse output i e P2 1 20 0 Page 114 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Positive Logic 1 Negative Logic Ones YO Valid Sate of Tens T1 Multi functional Hundreds T2 Output Terminal Thousands Expansion Card Yo1 Invalid E100 Ten Thousands Expansion Card Yo2 Invalid E100 The ones tens hundreds thousands and ten thousands of this function code respectively define the output logic of Output Terminal YO T1 T2 Expansion Card YO1 and YO2 0 Positive Logi
84. or 1 the initial value of the reference frequency is given by this function code Page 75 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope 0 Default Direction Running Direction 1 Negation of Direction The modification on this function code can realize the purpose of changing the motor steering without changing the connection of the motor and its role is equivalent to adjust any two lines of Motor U V and W to realize the conversion of t he steering direction of the motors This function code is valid in any running control mode Note Reset to factory parameters the running direction of the motor can restore to original state It should be used with caution for occasions that forbid from changing the motor steering after completing the debugging of the system Function code Function Name Setting scope PO 0 07 Maximum frequency 050 00Hz 320 00Hz The highest frequency refers to the maximum frequency that the frequency inverter allows to output When the analog input PULS Impulse Input multiplex directive input and simple PLC in E Series Frequency inverter are adopted as frequency source each percentage is set based on the value given by corresponding function code Note the modification to this set value can change the data which takes the set value of this unction code as calibration Function code Function Name Setting scope PO 0 08 Upper frequency Lower frequency highes
85. output FM If the correction has been done when leaving the factory when resetting to factory value the reset value is the value after factory correction Generally the application site cannot need to conduct correction Actually Measured Voltage use the measuring instruments to measure the voltage between terminal VF and terminal GND such as multi meter etc Target Voltage refer to theoretical voltage value of the frequency inverter based on corresponding relationship of analog output When correcting output two voltage values on each FM terminal and then input actually measured voltage value and target voltage to corresponding function codes the frequency inverter can conduct correction automatically Page 155 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter P9 0 Basic Monitoring Parameter P9 Parameter Group is used to monitor running state information of the frequency inverter the users can set corresponding parameter as required which can not only be rapidly viewed through panel for easy debugging and maintenance on site but also read through communication for monitoring of upper computer Function code Function name Description Unit P9 0 00 Running Frequency Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0 01Hz P9 0 01 Reference frequency Reference frequency of the frequency inverter 0 01Hz P9 0 02 Output Current Output current when the frequency inverter runs 0 01A
86. output fluctuation is the too small value can generate the oscillation The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain can be obtained at low frequency and a constant derivative gain can be obtained at high frequency The longer the derivative time is the greater the adjusting strength is Page 136 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 08 PID Deviation Limit 000 0 100 0 000 0 This function code is used to determine whether PID is adjusted to prevent unstable output frequency when the deviation between reference and feedback is small When the deviation between reference quantity and feedback quantity is less than the value set by P4 0 08 stop the adjustment to PID and the frequency inverter keeps stable output When the deviation between reference quantity and feedback quantity is greater than the value set by P4 0 08 adjust PID Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00 00 60 00s 00 00 VFI Input Filtering time is used to set the software filtering time of VF1 when the on site analog is easily to be interrupted the filtering time shall be increased to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the greater filtering time makes the response speed of the analog detection become slow how to set needs to balance based on actua
87. output terminal function is 59 Setting Coefficient Analog Output Property of B gt g Qutp Operation gt Corresponding operation P3 2 27 result of output setting Control Explanation for Operation Module Corresponding setting value Function Description code P Function 0 No Operation 1 Add Operation Subtraction Operation No operation conducted Address A data Address B data Address A data Address B data Multiply Operation Address A data X Address B data Division Operation Address A data Address B data Greater than Judgment If Address A data gt Address B data the non setting operation result is 1 or it is 0 Equal to Judgment If Address A data Address B data the non setting operation result is 1 or it is 0 Equal to or Greater than Judgment If Address A data gt Address B data the non setting operation result is 1 or it is 0 Integration Time of every Address B Data ms as unit means Address A Data added to non setting operation result e g If Address A Data is 100 and Address B Data is 1000 it indicates that 10 is added to non setting operation result per 1000ms The scope of the operation results is 32767 32767 When the operation results is less than 9999 all displayed decimal points of the digital tube completely indicate minus value e g 1 0 1 0 0 means 10100 Page 174 R
88. power on time arrival P5 1 00 of the frequency inverter Use the parameter initialization function to clear the record information Encoder Fault The frequency inverter is unable to identify the data of the encoder Check whether the type of the encoder matches Check whether the wiring connection of the encoder is correct Check whether the encoder or PG card is damaged Parameter Read Write Abnormity Damage of EEPROM Chip Change main control panel Motor Overheat Detection on excessive temperature of the motor Check whether the temperature of the motor is too high Check whether the temperature sensor is damaged or its wirings are loose Larger Speed Deviation Refer to the value of speed deviation larger than P6 1 23 and duration of P6 1 24 Check whether the parameters of the encoder is set correctly Check whether P6 123 and P6 124 are set rationally Check whether the motor parameter identification has been conducted Motor Overspeed Refer to the value of motor speed over P6 1 21 and duration of P6 1 221Check whether the parameters of the encoder is set correctly Check whether P6 121 and P6 122 are set rationally Check whether the motor parameter identification has been conducted Page 210 Initial Position Error Large deviation between motor parameters and actual parameters Check whether the motor parameters are corre
89. running of the synchronous motor so it is better to acquire these two parameters of the synchronous motor through identification by Function Code PO 0 24 after completing initial installation Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value Pole pairs of Rotary PO 1 34 00001 65535 Machine type Transformer When the encoder is rotary transformer i e PO 1 26 2 this function code is used to set its pole pairs Page 87 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 2 Group P1 Motor Control Parameter Group P1 0 Basic Group Function Name Setting scope 0 Straight Line 1 Multi point Broken Line V F Curve Mode 2 Square V F Curve 1 3 Square V F Curve 2 4 Square V F Curve 3 0 Straight Line V F Applicable for common constant torque load 1 Multi point Broken Line VF Relation Curve of any broken lines can be acquired through setting Function Code P1 1 00 P1 1 05 2 Square V F Applicable for centrifugal loads of fans water pumps etc 3 Square V F Curve 2 4 Square V F Curve 3 Refer to relation curve between straight line V F and square V F Each curve is shown in the figure below Output Volta e Nene Multi pint Broken Line Straight Line Square V F Curve 1 Square V F Curve 2 Square V F Curve 3 Output Frequency gt Function Name Setting scope 00 0 Automatic Torque Boost 00 1 30 0 Torque Boost Cutoff Frequency of Torque 000 00Hz
90. see tee teeeteeesteteeeceeeeeeeees 17 3 3 Wiring Of the Main CIFCUItsss ser rrr tee eet tt tee eee eet e teen teen cee eee nee cee cee eesneecescessnnnes Q 3 3 1 Wiring diagram for the main circuit and precautions trr tr tre tretet tere este te ee ee eees 18 3 3 2 Precautions for wiring the input side of the main circuits srr ttt eee tee eee eee eee eee 20 3 3 3 Precautions for wiring the output side of the main circuite teet rtrtt tte eesete teeter ees 21 3 3 4 Wiring and Supporting Peripherals for Main Circuits with Reference to the Table below 3 4 Connection of control circuit nee ee eee cece eee cee cee nee ee eee ee nee ene eee nae nee eee eee ees eee seeeennes 24 3 4 1 Arrangement and connection of controlling circuit terminals tst trt teret tet ee 24 3 4 2 Function of control circuit terminal ETETTETTETTETTETEETTETTETT Sooo ooo noone of 3 4 3 Wiring Instruction for Control Circuits ttt tte ct ete ee eee cee tee cee eee ee nee cee eee see eee eee DT 3 5 Grounding Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Rummings s see srr esesee see cee eeecee cee ees cee cee ces cesses cee eeseee eee 32 4 1 Option of operating mode testtreeeettesteee see cee tenteront enrenrerrerrereereereereneeree tee 32 4 2 Test run and inspection tts tet tettetett tetett ett tet ent entert estere enneren erenreerereesrensenentee tee 32 4 2 1 Precautions and inspection before test rumess eee cee cee cee cee coe cee cee
91. terminal state of the fault in the last time with the sequence as below VF2 VF1 DI10 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DIS DI4 DI3 DI2 DIL When the input terminal is ON and its corresponding binary digit is 1 OFF is 0 it is to convert binary digit into denary digit Output Terminal State 1 when at fault Input terminal state of the fault in the last time with the sequence as below M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 Y0O2 YO1 T2 T1 YO When the input terminal is ON and its corresponding binary digit is 1 OFF is 0 it is to convert binary digit into denary digit Frequency inverter State 1 when at fault Use of manufacturer Power on Time 1 when at fault Current power on time of the fault in the last time Page 146 Running Time 1 when at fault Current running time of the fault in the last time Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Description of parameter P6 0 11 Fault Frequency 2 P6 0 12 Fault Current2 P6 0 13 Bus Voltage 2 when at Fault P6 0 14 Input Terminal State 2 when at fault Same as P6 0 03 P6 0 10 P6 0 15 Output Terminal State 2 when at fault P6 0 16 Frequency inverter State 2 when at fault P6 0 17 Power on Time 2 when at fault P6 0 18 Running Time 2 when at fault P6 0 19 Fault Frequency 3 P6 0 20 Fault Current3 P6 0 21 Bus Voltag
92. the braking force is Starting DC Brake Time refer to duration time of outputting the start DC brake current in the process of starting the frequency inverter Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Reducing speed to shut down P1 0 16 1 Shut down freely Shutdown mode 0 0 Stop by Speed Deceleration After the stop command is effective the frequency inverter reduces the output frequency based on deceleration time and stops after the frequency is reduced to 0 1 Free Stop After the stop command is effective the frequency inverter immediately stops outputting and the motor stops freely based on mechanical inertia at this time Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Stop DC Braking Initial P1 0 17 Frequency 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 000 00 P1 0 18 Stop DC Braking Hold Time 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 P1 0 19 Stop DC Braking Current 000 100 000 P1 0 20 Stop DC Braking Time 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 Start Frequency of Stop DC Brake when the output frequency is reduced to this frequency in the stopping process by reducing the speed after waiting for the time set by P1 0 18 it is to start stop DC brake process Hold Time of Stop DC Brake when the output frequency is reduced to the start frequency of stop DC brake the frequency inverter first stops outputting for a period and then restarts DC brake process so as to prevent
93. the value given by P0 0 05 Prohibition of Acceleration amp Deceleration When this terminal state is valid the output frequency of the frequency inverter is not impacted by the signal except for stop command PID Pause PID Control fails temporarily the frequency inverter maintains the running of current output frequency and can t conduct PID Regulation of the frequency source PLC State Reset During executing process of PLC the frequency inverter is reset the frequency inverter to initial state of Simple PLC through this terminal Wobbulating Pause The frequency inverter outputs in central frequency and the wobbulating function suspends Counter Input Be used for defining the output terminal of count impulse If it is high speed pulse connect Terminal DI6 Counter Reset Conduct reset handling to counter Length Counting Input Be used for defining the output terminal of length count impulse If it is high speed pulse connect Terminal D16 Length Reset Conduct reset handling to length Torque Control Prohibition Prohibit the frequency inverter from running in torque control mode and the frequency inverter only can run in speed control mode PULS Impulse Input Define PULS Impulse Input Terminal and connect Terminal DI6 Immediate DC Brake When this terminal state is valid the frequency inverter is directly switched to DC Switch State External Faul
94. them with screws T O Expansion Card Installation Mode of I O Expansion Card Appearance of I O Expansion Card Page 219 Appendix 3 Multi function I O Expansion Card 3 Description for Control Terminal Category Terminal Name of Terminal Explanation for Function Digital Input Terminal DI7 COM Digital Input 7 DI8 COM Digital Input 8 DI9 COM Digital Input 9 DI10 COM Digital Input 10 Specific functions refer to explanation for use of Function Code P2 0 06 P2 0 09 Multi functional Output Terminal YO CME Multi functional Open Collector Output 1 YO2 CME Multi functional Open Collector Output 2 Specific functions refer to explanation for use of Function Code P2 0 08 P2 0 31 Drive Capability DC48V 50mA below Analog Input Terminal VF3 GND Analog Input Terminal 3 Be used for receiving external analog signal input which is voltage signal OV 10V or current signal 0 4mA 20mA 24V Power Supply 24V Power Supply Output Externally provide DC 24V Supply Voltage which is generally used for digital input terminal or working power supply of external low voltage devices Drive Capability Max Output Current 300mA Communication Terminal Positive Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication Negative Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication Note if Terminal VF3 is adopted it is to short J9 on I O expansi
95. to output default phase When at P6 1 01 1 if the output default phase or three phase input imbalance is detected out the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err12 Page 147 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope 000 without protection to overvoltage and stalling speed 001 100 Overvoltage Stall Protection P6 1 02 Sensitivity Overvoltage Stall Protection P6 1 03 Sensitivity 120 150 In the deceleration process of the frequency inverter after the DC Bus Voltage exceeds over voltage stall protection voltage point the frequency inverter stops reducing the speed and keeps current running frequency until the bus voltage is reduced to below over voltage stall protection voltage point and then the frequency inverter continues to reduce the speed The setting value of Function Code P6 1 03 is the percentage relative to normal bus voltage Over voltage stall protection sensitivity is used to adjust the ability of the frequency inverter on suppressing the overvoltage The higher this value is the stronger the ability of suppressing the overvoltage is Function code Function Name Setting scope 000 without protection to overcurrent and stalling speed 001 100 Overvoltage Stall Protection P6 1 04 Voltage Point Overcurrent Stall Protection P6 1 05 Sensitivity 100 200 In the acceleration and deceleration process of the freq
96. way analog input which can be voltage signal or can also be current signal oa Shift switch J5 1 to U side which enable to receive the signal at OV 10V DC Current source ae Shift switch J5 2 to U side which enable to receive the signal at OV 10V DC onion Shift switch J5 2 to I side which enable to receive the signal at 0 4mA 20mA Shift switch J5 1 to I side which enable to receive the signal at 0 4mA 20mA When the frequency inverter uses the analog input as frequency source reference torque reference PID reference or feedback corresponding curve can be chosen for the relationship between the voltage or current value and reference value or feedback quantity through function code P2 1 02 and the corresponding curve parameters are set The sampling value of Terminal VF can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 09 and P9 0 10 Refer to the figure below for explanation of Curve 2 and milar as above eiiiai Signal Source Option P2 1 02 01 Curve D ermina i i i i Signal 1 vB i GND P2 0 13 P2 0 15 mA Curve A P2 1 02 03 Curve 3 eet i gt P2 1 05 rae cc gt quantity PRERE prion P2 1 07 f Feedback romo P2 1 02 i stint VF2 TU 2 i 1 i quantity Signal 2 oe 1 i gt GND 1 4 i P2 1 09 H i e i 1 P21 11 H i i e se L2 J P2 1 04 P2 1 06 P2 1 08 P2 1 10 V i 1 f 1 i Page 178 Chapte
97. 0 0 Define relation curve between Maximum Input of PULS 050 00 impulse frequency input and PID feedback Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of PULS 100 0 PULS Filtering time When the field impulse signal is easily interrupted please increase the filtering time to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the longer the filtering time the slower the detected response speed is Page 195 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Function code Function name Factory value Description Attribution Proportional Gains KP1 The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is the larger the adjustment volume is and the faster the response is but the too large value can generate the system oscillation the smaller the value of KPI is the more stable the system is and the slower the response is Integral Time Til The greater the value of Integral Time Til is the slower the response is and the more stable the output is the worse the fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is the smaller the value of TI is the faster the response is and the greater the output fluctuation is the too small value can generate the oscillation Derivative Time TD1 The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain can be obtained at low frequency and a constant derivative g
98. 0 0 3200 0 P3 1 15 Impulse Count per Distance 000 00 600 00 X Dx DX Xd Dea Dl Dal Xa Group P3 2 Built in Logic PLC Function Group Intermediate Delay Relay Control 0 the input of this relay is determined by this Relay Control Word A 1 the input of this relay is determined by this Relay Control Word B 2 the input of this relay is determined by this Relay Control Word C Ones Relay 1 M1 Tens Relay 2 M2 Hundreds Relay 3 M3 Thousands Relay 4 M4 Ten Thousands Relay 5 M5 Intermediate Control Word A Relay 0 Reference 0 1 Reference 1 Ones M1 Tens M2 Hundreds M3 Thousands M4 Ten Thousands M5 ermediate Delay Relay 1 Control Word B ermediate Delay Relay M2 Control Word B ermediate Delay Relay 3 Control Word B ermediate Delay Relay M4 Control Word B Page 56 Intermediate Delay Relay MS Control Word B Ones Control Logic 0 Input 1 1 Input 1 and NOT 2 Input and Input 2 AND 3 Input 1 and Input 2 OR 4 Input and Input 2 XOR 5 the valid reference of Input 1 is valid the valid Reference of Input 2 is invalid 6 Valid reference of Input 1 Rise Edge is valid Valid reference of Input 2 Rise Edge is invalid 7 Reverse valid signal of Input 1 Rising Edge 8 Input 1 Rise Edge is valid and output a impulse signal with width of 200ms 9 Input 1 Rise Edge and Input 2 AND Functio
99. 0 09 Lower frequency 10 00Hz Lowest frequency of the frequency inverter that allows running Lower frequency PO 0 10 operation mode When the reference frequency is less than lower frequency the frequency inverter runs at lower frequency Upper Limit Frequency Source Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference Upper frequency is determined by different combinations of DI2 DI3 DI4 and DIS DI Terminal Function Define that Terminal DII is forward start DI2 Terminal Function DI3 Terminal Function DI4 Terminal Function DIS5 Terminal Function Define the functions of Terminal Di2 DI3 DI4 and DIS and determine the upper frequency through their different combinations Phase Directive 0 100 0 Upper frequency at disconnection of DIS DI4 DI3 and DI2 refer to percentage of the highest frequency Phase Directive 1 090 0 pper frequency only when DI2 is onnected Ditto Phase Directive 2 080 0 pper frequency only when DI3 is onnected Ditto Phase Directive 4 070 0 pper frequency only when DI4 is onnected Ditto Phase Directive 8 060 0 pper frequency only when DIS is connected Ditto Analog Input Curve Selection H 43 Define VF1 Select Curve 3 and VF2 Select Curve 4 VFI Filtering time 0 10 Sec VF2 Filtering time 0 10 Sec When the on site analog is easily to be interrupted the filtering time shall be increas
100. 00 0 Stop after End of Single Cycle The frequency inverter stops automatically after completing one cycle 1 Keep Final Value after End of Single Running The frequency inverter runs at reference frequency of final phase after completing one cycle 2 Continuous Cycle The frequency inverter continues to run until the stop command is given 3 N Times of Cycle The frequency inverter stops automatically after cycling N times N is set by reference value of Function Code P3 0 01 Function Code Function name Setting Scope Factory Value P3 0 01 Cycle Times N 00000 65000 00000 This function code is used to set the times of cycle running at Function Code P3 0 00 3 Function Code Function name Setting Scope Ones Option of Power off Memory 0 No Power off Memory Option of PLC 1 Power off Memory Power off Memory Tens Stop Memory Selection 0 No Stop Memory 1 Stop Memory PLC Power off Memory means running phase and running frequency of PLC before memory power off when powering on next time the frequency inverter continues to run from memory phase If it is selected not to memory every power on needs to restart the process of PLC PLC Stop Memory means running phase and running frequency of PLC before memory shutdown when running next time the frequency inverter continues to run from memory phase If it is selected not to memory every start needs to restart the process of PLC Page 122 Func
101. 00GOR4S2B 1 0 10 100G0R75S2B 1 0 10 00G1R5S2B 1 0 16 0 eek 100G2R2S2B 1 0 T2 Three phase 220V OOGOR4AT2B 0 00GOR75T2B 1 0 00G1R5T2B 1 0 ty m 100G2R2T2B 1 0 T4 Three phase 380V 4100GOR75T4B 0 00G1R5T4B 1 1100G2R2T4B 00G3R7T4B 2 CDI E180 Series Type of Frequency inverter Main Circuit Wire Gage mm2 a0 1 0 0 Control Circuit Wire Gage mm2 Use free air breaker MCCB A Electromagnetic contactorMC A E180GOR75T4B 10 10 E180G1R5T4B 16 10 E180G2R2T4B 16 10 E180G3R7 P5R5 25 16 E180G3R5MT4B 32 25 E180G5R5 P7R5 32 25 E180G7R5 P011 40 32 E180G011MT4B 63 40 E180G011 P015 BL 63 40 E180G015 018 5T4BL 63 40 E180G018 5 P022T4 D PSS p 63 E180G022 P030T4 63 E180G030 P037 palpa E180G037 P045 FP Slosloloafalolo cofolafalan E180G6045 P055 E180G055 P075 1 o DO oy ol E180G6075 P093 ol oy oy ojo ayaa ola ol olo CO OC O oO Page 23 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 4 Connection of control circuit 3 4 1 Arrangement and connection of controlling circuit terminals 1 CDI
102. 00V DC megohmmeter Do not measure insulation of control loop with megohmmeter And high voltage test is needless finished in ex works 3 Replacement of wearing parts Wearing parts of frequency inverter includes cooling fan filter ELCC of which service life depend on operating environment and maintenance condition closely User could confirm replacement period according to the operating time A Cooling fan Potential damage reason Shaft abrasion and vane aging Critical standard If there is crack on vane of fan or if abnormal sound occurs during starting B Filter ELCC Potential damage reason Bad input power higher ambient temperature frequent load switch or aging of electrolyte Critical standard If liquid leaks if safety valve bulged out measure of static capacitance and measure of insulated resistance Page 12 Chapter 2 Product Information 4 Storage of frequency inverter After purchased the device please pay attention to following points while storing it A Please store it in original package as much as possible B Long term storage should cause aging of ELCC please electrify it for 5 hours above twice a year during storing in mode of raising voltage to rated voltage slowly via transformer 5 Guarantee of frequency inverter Maintenance free is limited to the frequency inverter only The Company will provide guaranteed repair for fault or damage occurs during normal application For device sold
103. 1 Impulse Output KHz 100 00KHz Re ay Output 1 AC 250V 3A below DC 30V 3A below Relay Output 2 AC 250V 3A below DC 30V 3A below Digital signal power supply can externally provide 24V power supply and has Max Current of 300mA Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 2 CDI E180 Series 7 16 I I FM2 H a FMI U U CDI E180 control panel moc mes U E J5 YO 10V VF2 FM1 COM D12 D14 DI6 Epp TIA TIB TIC VF1 GND FM2 DI1 DI3 DIS OP P24 T2A T2B T2C The wiring diagrams or E 180 Main Circuit and Control Circuit are as below Brake Unit Ordering configuration required for those above 15kW DC Reactor rake Circuit Resistance Breaker Poi Pa ma Three phase LL Z i Asynchronous Motor E Pn L2 E s CDI E180 Series y Speed Regulator Isr w The default is to use TAN T O Communication 2 Expansion Card Interfac 24V Power Supply op xpansion Card Intertace FM1 Digital Input L Analog Signal Input 1 nee ODI GND 0 10V 4 20mA te t igital Input 2 i Digital Input 3 DIB Deti tae FM20 gt Analog Signal Input 2 igital Inpu Be Digital Input 4 sa Tasma pi GNDOJ 0 10V 4 20mA Digital Input 5 DIS YO P2 1 20 1 Digital Input 6 YO FMP O Multi functional Collector Output pete
104. 1000 CDI E180G5R5 P7R5T4B Built in allowable Max Current 40A 100 1000 CDI E180G7R5 P011T4B Built in allowable Max Current 15A 80 1200 CDI E180G011MT4B Built in allowable Max Current 50A 50 2000 CDI E180G011 POIST4BL Built in allowable Max Current 50A 50 2000 CDI E180G015 P018 5T4BL Built in allowable Max Current 75A 40 2500 CDI E180G018 5 P022T4 CDI BR 50 35 2800 CDI E180G022 P030T4 CDI BR 50 30 3200 CDI E180G030 P037T4 CDI BR 100 5000 CDI E180G037 P045T4 CDI BR 100 6000 CDI E180G045 P055T4 CDI BR 200 6500 CDI E180G055 P075T4 CDI BR 200 10000 CDI E180G075 P093T4 CDI BR 200 12000 Page 218 Appendix 3 Multi function I O Expansion Card Appendix 3 Multi function I O Expansion Card 1 Introduction Expansion Card E180 I O is developed by Delixi Hangzhou Inverter Co Ltd and is applied for CDI E180 Series Terminal I O Its specific configuration is as below Configuration Function name Input Terminal 4 way Digital Input DI7 DI10 1 way Analog Input VF3 Output Terminal 2 way Multi functional Open Collector Output YOI YO2 Communication RS 485 Communication Interface SG SG 2 Mechanical Installation The frequency inverter shall be installed when it switched off completely Align I O expansion card with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency inverter and then fix
105. 1H Parameter Only writable BOOOH B001H Only Readable Explanation for Read and Write Address of Function Code Parameters High order parameter address is composed of groups and levels by the function code parameters For the service life of EEPROM is limited the EEPROM cannot be stored frequently in the process of communication Therefore some function codes don t need to be stored in EEPROM in the process of communication but only need to modify the value in RAM If it is required to write them into EEPROM the high order parameter address adopts the hexadecimal number and low parameter address adopts decimal number that then is converted to the hexadecimal number And then the high order and low order parameter address constitutes a four digit hexadecimal number E g The address of writing P2 1 12 to EEPROM is as below High order address is 21 by hexadecimal system and lower order address is 12 by decimal system which is OC after conversion into hexadecimal system so the address indicates 0x210C If it is not required to write it into EEPROM the high order parameter address adopts hexadecimal number and adds 4 digits and low order parameter address adopts decimal number then is converted to the hexadecimal number And then the high order and low order parameter address constitutes a four digit hexadecimal number E g The address of not writing P2 1 12 to EEPROM is as below High order address is 21 by hexadecimal s
106. 2 0 17 Cuver 2 P2 0 18 P2 0 22 P2 1 02 Cuver 3 P2 1 04 P2 1 11 P2 1 03 Cuver 4 P2 1 12 P2 VF1 Q Z J JP5 ya i 2 I 0 4 20mA VF2 GND PULS Impulse Terminal P3 0 03 P3 0 05 P3 0 07 P3 0 09 P3 0 11 P3 0 13 P3 0 15 P3 0 17 P3 0 19 P3 0 21 P3 0 23 P3 0 25 P3 0 27 P3 0 29 P3 0 31 P3 0 33 g T y Q O z P3 0 00 P3 0 51 Group P4 Function arameter P2 0 00 P2 0 09 9 10 1 1 12 Upper Computer Internal Operation Module Keybaord V A on Increase and Decrease PO 0 05 Frequency or UP DOWN Terminal on Hold of Power Failure Keyboard Potentiometer Cuver 1 P2 0 13 P2 0 17 VFI GND Cuver 2 P2 0 18 P2 0 22 P2 1 02 Cuver3 P2 1 04 P2 1 11 P2 1 03 VF2 GND Cuver 4 P2 1 12 P2 1 19 P3 0 03 P3 0 05 P3 0 07 P3 0 09 P3 0 11 P3 0 13 P3 0 15 P3 0 17 P3 0 19 P3 0 21 P3 0 23 P3 0 25 P3 0 27 P3 0 29 P3 0 31 P3 0 33 DI1 DI10 COM P3 0 00 P3 0 51 Group P4 Function Parameter P2 0 00 P2 0 09 9 10 1 1 12 Upper Computer Internal Operation Module Page 164 Hold of Power PO 0 04 Keyboard Sett Storage for Po No Failure Keyboard Setting Storage for Power Failure Keyboard Potentiometer 3 External Terminal VFI Terminal VF2 5 PULS Impulse Reference Multiplex Directive Ter minal Simple PLC Communication Reference 10 13 Operation Result PO 1 01 Keyboard Setting No efi er Failure Keyboard Setting Storage for Power
107. 7 accelerating an Reference frequency 1 Re Deceleration time 2 100Hz PO 1 08 ey 000 00 Highest Frequency 002 00 P0 1 09 Jogging Acceleration time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0020 0 P0 1 10J ogging Deceleration time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0020 0 PO 1 11 Acceleration time 2 0000 0s 6500 0s pane Machine type Machine type Machine type Machine type Machine type PX Xe e PO 1 12 Deceleration time 2 0000 0s 6500 0s PO 1 13 Acceleration time 3 0000 0s 6500 0s PO 1 14 Deceleration time 3 0000 0s 6500 0s P0 1 15 Acceleration time 4 0000 0s 6500 0s PO 1 16 Deceleration time 4 0000 0s 6500 0s Frequency Switch Point P0 1 17 between Acceleration time 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 000 00 1 and Acceleration time 2 X e e Me e Frequency Switch Point between Deceleration time 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 1 and Deceleration time 2 Xe Acceleration and 0 Straight Line 1 Curve S 1 Deceleration Mode 2 Curve S 2 Percentage of Startin Phase of Curve S 000 0 100 0 Percentage of Ending Phase of Curve S Hopping Frequency 1 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 000 0 100 0 Hopping Frequency 2 000 00Hz Highest Frequency Hopping Frequency scope 000 00Hz Highest Frequency Jogging Priority 0 Invalid 1 Valid Page 44 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters i Modi Refe AOE On Function na
108. Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Output Frequency Range of 1 2 Hoping Frequgsfcy Hoping Frequency 1 4 Range of 1 2 Hopjfg Frequency te of 1 2 Hoping Frequency Hoping Fr cy 2 oping Seda Range of 1 2 Hoping Frequency Reference Frequency Function code Function Name Setting scope PO 1 25 Jogging Priority O Invalid 1 Valid This function code is used to set whether the priority of the jogging function is the highest The jogging function includes Keyboard Jogging Function and Terminal Jogging Function When at P0 1 25 1 if the jogging command occurs in the running process the switch of frequency inverter is the jogging running state The target frequency is the jogging frequency and the acceleration and deceleration time is the jogging acceleration and deceleration time Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 ABZ Incremental Encoder 1 UVW Incremental Encoder E100 Invalid 2 Rotary Transformer E100Invalid 3 9 Reservation Type of Encoder 10 Distance Control Open Collector This function code is used to set the selected type of the Encoder CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter supports various types of the encoders Different encoder needs to configure different encoder expansion card when in use the correct encoder expansion card shall be selected and ordered The synchronous motor may select any one of three types of the encoders in the table
109. Description 4 Frequency Arrival Refer to the Description for Function Code P2 2 02 5 Zero speed Running no output when shut down When the frequency inverter is at running state and the output frequency is 0OHz output Signal ON Motor Overload Pre alarm Before overload protection action of the motor the judgment can be made according to the threshold value of early alarm to overload after exceeding the threshold value of early alarm output Signal ON Refer to the Description for Function Code P1 0 25 and P1 0 26 Frequency inverter Overload Pre alarm The frequency inverter outputs Signal ON 10s prior to occurrence of overload protection Reference Count Value Arrival When actual accounting value reaches the set value of Function Code P3 1 11 output Signal ON Designated Count Value Arrival When actual accounting value reaches the set value of Function Code P3 1 12 output Signal ON Length Arrival When actual length P9 0 13 reaches the length set by Function Code P3 1 08 0utput Signal ON PLC circulation cycle completed When simple PLC running completes a cycle output the impulse signal with the width of 250ms Accumulative Running Time Arrival When the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter reaches the time set by Function Code P2 2 01 output Signal ON Frequency Limit When the output frequency of the frequency inverter reaches upper freq
110. Directive 12 100 0 100 0 P3 0 28 Phase 12 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s P3 0 29 Phase Directive 13 100 0 100 0 P3 0 30 Phase 13 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s P3 0 31 Phase Directive 14 100 0 100 0 P3 0 32 Phase 14 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s P3 0 33 Phase Directive 15 100 0 100 0 P3 0 34 Phase 16 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s P3 0 35 Phase 0 attribution Ones Acceleration amp Deceleration P3 0 36 Phase 1 attribution Time Selection Invalid Multiplex Directive P3 0 37 Phase 2 attribution 0 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 1 P3 0 38 Phase 3 attribution 1 Acceleration amp Deceleration P3 0 39 Phase 4 attribution Time 2 2 Acceleration amp Deceleration P3 0 40 Phase 5 attribution Time 3 P3 0 41 Phase 6 attribution 3 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time 4 P3 0 42 Phase 7 attribution Tens Frequency Source Selection P3 0 43 Phase 8 attribution Valid Multiplex Directive Current Phase Directive P3 0 44 Phase 9 attribution Keyboard Potentiometer P3 0 45 Phase 10 attribution Keyboard Frequency Reference VF1 Input P3 0 46 Phase 11 attribution VF2 Input P3 0 47 Phase 12 attribution PULS Reference DI6 PID Reference P3 0 48 Phase 13 attribution Operation Result 1 P3 0 49 Phase 14
111. E g pod i Current level A I 1 detected signal I i j i it i Time gt Current Level Detection 1 and Detection Width of Current Level 1 are the percentage of the rated current of the motor Page 120 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 17 Current Level Detection 2 000 0 300 0 P2 2 18 Detection Width of Current Level 2000 0 300 0 The above function codes have the same functions with Function Code P2 2 15 and P2 2 16 refer to the Description of Function Code P2 2 15 and P2 2 16 for more details Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is Current 2 Arrival Output 29 Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 19 VFI Input Lower Limit 00 00V P2 220 P2 2 20 VFI Input Upper Limit P2 219 11 00V When the input value of Analog VFI is less than the value set by Function Code P2 2 19 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is VF Input less than lower limit 21 or above limit 31 When the input value of Analog VFI is less than the value set by Function Code P2 2 20 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is VF Input less than lower limit 22 or above limit 31 Function code Functio
112. E100 Series J7 E U FM2 1 J U zm VF2 CDI E100 Series control panel JO g U m vr FMiL_ 1 D sG 10v vF2 FM1 com Di2 pia pie XO TIA TIB TIC SG VF1 GND FM2 DI1 DI3 DIS OP P24 T2A T2B T2C The wiring diagrams or E 100 Main Circuit and Control Circuit are as below Brake Resistance L Circuit Breaker p PB LL xR U l L2 T S CDLEIO00 Series V L3 E r Speed Regulator w The default is to use O P24V 24V Power Supply op FM1 Digital Input L ODII GND Digital Input 2 O DI Digital Input 3 Digital FM2 ODI3 g Digital Input 4 nput GND E DI4 Terminal Digital Input lt Dis igita YO FMP Digital Input 6 D Common Terminal Digital Signal ommon emmma ocom Common COM Terminal External Potentiometer 1K yay Analog Signal TIA gt 222 0O 10V Power Supply TIB Analog Signal lt OVE I input 1 Tic ve Analog Signal Input 2 Analog Signal S Ground TA T2B RS485 Communication SGE TC Interface SG P24V COM Three phase Asynchronous Motor 7 J e Page 24 An 0 l YAn l 0 alog Signal Output 1 OV 4 20mA alog Signal Output 2 0V 4 20mA YO P2 1 20 1 Mul ti functional Collector Output DC48V 50mA FMP P2 1 20 0 0 0
113. Frequency X Amplitude of Wobbulation Mutation Frequency Reference Frequency X Amplitude of Wobbulation X Sudden Jump of Amplitude Wobbulating Cycle refer to the time value of a complete wobbulating cycle Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulation refer to the percentage of Triangular Wave Rise Time relative to wobbulating cycle P3 1 06 Triangular Wave Rise Time Wobbulating CycleX Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulation Unit Second Triangular Wave Fall Time Wobbulation Unit Second Refer to the figure below for explanation Wobbulating CycleX 1 Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulating f At No Wobbulating Wobbulating Run of Frequency inverter Winding motor Uniform line speed aes rotation A Reciprocating Running Gear Pendulum Bar Motor Page 177 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Output 4 Frequency a ra an Mutation OP Frequency Amplitude Central Frequency 1 1 1 ji 1 t 1 if i I 1 if 1 L 1 if T Amplitude Mutation Frequency I 1 GEAG 4 4 i gt lt gt I 1 Fall Time on 4 re A Rise Time of Angular aN l me Acceleration Triangular Wave f IDeceleration ime 1 Wobbulating Cycle Time Running paiza i Command Note the output frequency of wobbulation is subject to upper frequency and lower frequency 7 1 17 Analog Input Output Use 1 Analog Input E Series Frequency inverter support 2
114. Functions treet cette tee eee cee cee eee cee c ee cee eee nee cesses ces censsecescescee 77 II Content TAAT Analog Input Output OR eee ies 7 1 18 Digital Input Output OR eon 7 1 19 Communication of Upper Computer T 1 20 Parameter Identification Peete reer etter terre rrr errr errr rrr errr reer erry 7 2 Application Case eee eet eter terre rer rer rer rer errr eet errr rere rr rer 7 2 1 PID control for Water Supply at Permanent Pressuress trrrtr srr eeeeee see se eter ees 184 7 2 2 Application for Injection Molding Machine Energy saving Transformation 187 7 2 3 PID Constant Speed and Fixed length Control Functionss tt rrrrtrtretesees esses 190 7 2 4 PID Constant Speed and Fixed distance Control Function 7 2 5 Double Pumps Switching Function seseseseessesosesesssessesssessssssessesssesesessssosesee 198 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication stess tessere sree see ser see eee eee ee 200 Chapter 9 Fault Je Crotal Piat A T 7S 9 1 Frequency inverter Fault and Exclusion Measures ettette setters tettette ter eee eee t 208 9 2 Motor Fault and Exclusion Measures sststssct sess see ees cee eee ees cen cee cesses cee ceeneseeenes 212 Appendix 1 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Methods tss erterterserterrereererreereereereere eee 213 Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts A2 1 Alternative Current Reactor ACL aaa oia aa aa aa e A2 2 DC reactor
115. Highest Frequency Boost Page 88 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters In order to compensate the property of controlling the lower frequency torque by V F the boosting compensation is conducted for output voltage in low frequency working area Under normal circumstances the factory value can meet the requirements if the compensation is too great the current fault may occur When the load is heavier and the low frequency torque of the motor is not enough it suggests increasing this parameter When the load is lighter this parameter can be reduced The frequency inverter is automatic torque boost when the torque boost is set at 00 0 the frequency inverter can automatically calculate the required torque boost value based on the parameters of the motor as stator resistance etc Torque Boost Cut off Frequency when the output frequency is below this set value the torque boost is valid in case of exceeding this set value the torque boost is invalid Function code Function Name Setting scope P1 0 03 Sup Compensation 000 0 200 0 This function code is only valid for asynchronous motor and the percentage relative to rated slip of motor When it is the slip that is compensated by the motor for rated load the rated slip of the motor can be calculated and acquired based on rated frequency of the motor and rated speed V F Slip Compensation can compensate asynchronous motor for the speed deviation of the motor occurred
116. In regions at an altitude of more than 1000 meters the heat dissipation capability of the frequency inverter might be compromised because of the thin air Therefore de rated operation will be necessary In such cases please contact us for technical advice 6 The standard matched motor is a four pole squirrel cage asynchronous machine In case of discrepancy please choose appropriate frequency inverters in accordance with the rated current of the motor 7 Do not start or stop the frequency inverter with contactors Otherwise damage might occur to the equipment 8 Do not modify factory parameter of frequency inverter without authorization or damage might be caused Page 3 Chapter 2 Product Information Chapter 2 Product Information 2 1 Nameplate data and naming rule Nameplate data for example CDI E1 80G055T4BHL DELIXI Model Input CDI E180G055T4BHL AC 3PH 380 15 50 60Hz Output AC 3PH 0 380V 0 3200Hz 110A E180G055T4BHL13B0001 DELIXI HANGZHOU INVERTER CO LTD CE CDI E180 G 055 T4 B H L Delixi Frequency inverter Product Series number CDI E100 Series CDI E180 Series Product Type G General type P Air blower Pump type Adaptive Motor A A No No Built in DC Reactor L Built in DC Reactor No LED Digital Tube Keyboard H LCD Display Keyboard No Not Built in Brake Unit B Built in Brake Unit Power Page 4 Voltage
117. Page 152 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 8 Group P7 User Function Customization P7 0 Basic Group Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P7 0 00 ser Function 0 0 0 01 U0 0 01 P7 0 01 ser Function 1 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 02 P7 0 02 ser Function 2 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 03 P7 0 03 ser Function 3 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 07 P7 0 04 ser Function 4 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 08 P7 0 05 ser Function 5 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 17 P7 0 06 ser Function 6 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 18 P7 0 07 ser Function 7 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 08 ser Function 8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 09 ser Function 9 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 10 ser Function 10 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 11 ser Function 11 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 12 ser Function 12 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 13 ser Function 13 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 14 ser Function 14 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 15 ser Function 15 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 16 ser Function 16 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 17 ser Function 17 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 18 ser Function 18 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 19 ser Function 19 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 20 ser Function 20 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 21
118. Proportional Gain 2 001 100 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 2 00 01 10 00 Switching Frequency 2 P1 0 06 Highest Frequency Start Mode 0 Direct Start 1 Speed Tracking Mode 2 Brake and Restart Me Pep Oe Xe Pe e Speed Tracking Mode 0 Start from Shutdown Frequency 1 Start from Zero Speed 2 Start from Highest Frequency Start Frequency 00 00Hz 10 00Hz Page 45 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters i Modi Refe Fumeton Function name Setting scope Haon fication rence code Value Jimit page Hold Time of Start P1 0 13 Frequency 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 90 P1 0 14 Starting DC Brake Current 000 100 000 P1 0 15 Starting DC Brake Time 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 0 Stop by Deceleration P1 0 16 Stop Mode 1 Free Stop 0 A Stop DC Braking Initial P1 0 17 Pe A Be ee 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 000 00 x 91 p1 0 18 Stop DC Braking Hold 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 x P1 0 19 Stop DC Braking Current 000 100 000 X P1 0 20 Stop DC Braking Time 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 xk P1 0 21 Braking Use Rate 000 100 100 x P1 0 22 Carrier Frequency 00 5kHz 16 0kHz 06 0 xX 0 Rotate at running 92 P1 0 23 Fan Control 1 Continuous Running 0 2 Control based on Temperature 0 Prohibition Motor Overload 1 Curve 1 P1 0 24 Protection 2 Curve 2 l M i 3 Curv
119. Timer Reset Terminal 1 When internal timer reset is controlled by this terminal this terminal state is valid the timer resets refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 23 Timer Reset Terminal 2 When internal timer reset is controlled by this terminal this terminal state is valid the timer resets refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 23 Encoder Phase A Input Encoder Phase B Input Define the signal input terminal of Encoder A and B Terminal D15 and D16 of CDI E100 Series can connect high speed impulse of the encoder the impulse frequency of the encoder of other terminals is not greater than 200Hz The impulse frequency of CDI E180 Series encoder must be less than 200Hz Distance Reset Conduct reset handling to the distance Integral Computation Reset Reset the integral computation in operation module User Function 1 4 Reservation Page 103 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Appendix 1 Description for Functions of Multiplex Directive Terminals Multiplex Directive 0 Multiplex Directive 1 Multiplex Directive 2 Multiplex Directive 3 Multiplex Directive 4 Multiplex Directive 5 Multiplex Directive 6 Multiplex Directive 7 Multiplex Directive 8 Multiplex Directive 9 Multiplex Directive 10 Multiplex Directive 11 Multiplex Directive 12 Multiplex Directive 13
120. Value of PID is the percentage relative to the highest frequency refer to the description of the figure below Output frequency PID Initial Value a a gt Hold Time of PID Initial Value Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 000 0 No Judgment on P4 0 18 PID Feedback Loss Detection Feedback Loss 000 0 000 1 100 0 P4 0 19 lati Loss Detection 00 0s 20 0s 00 0 Page 138 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters These two function codes are used to judge whether the feedback signal of PID is missing When at P4 0 18 0 0 no judgment is made for whether the feedback signal of PID is missing When at P4 0 18 gt 0 0 actual PID Feedback Value is less than the value given by P4 0 18 and the duration of time exceeds the time given by P4 0 19 the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Err20 Fault it is deemed that the feedback signal of PID is missing Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 No Operation P4 0 20 PID Stop Operation 1 Operation This function code is used to set whether PID operates when the frequency inverter is in shutdown state 0 No Operation When the frequency inverter runs PID operates when the frequency inverter shuts down PID can t operate choose this under general conditions 1 Operation No matter what the state of the frequency inverter is running state or shutdown state PID operates P4 1 Communi
121. Vf2 Voltage between VF2 and GND before VF2 Correction correction The sampling line speed of DI6 impulse is equal to Line Speed the acquisition of impulse count per minute per 1m min meter View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input 0 001V Current Power on Time Length of current power on time Imin Current Running Time Length of current running time 0 1min Residual Running Time Frequency of Frequency Source A Residual running time at Timing Function of P3 1 00 0 1min View the frequency given by Frequency A 0 01Hz Page 156 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Description Frequency of P9 0 26 Frequency Source B Communication Set The value set by corresponding communication address value A001 is the percentage of the highest frequency View the frequency given by Frequency B P9 0 27 P9 0 28 Impulse frequency View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input P9 0 29 Encoder Feedback Actual running frequency of the motor from a Speed feedback of the encoder P9 0 30 Actual Distance View actual distance value of the distance value of oo Value the frequency inverter Saas Reservation P9 0 46 Operation Result 1 Check the value of operation result 1 P9 0 47 Operation Result 2 Check the value of operation result 2 P9 0 48 Operation Result 3 Check the value of operation result 3 P9 0 49 Ope
122. X X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 P7 0 01 ser Function 1 P7 0 02 ser Function 2 P7 0 03 ser Function 3 P7 0 04 ser Function 4 P7 0 05 ser Function 5 P7 0 06 ser Function 6 P7 0 07 ser Function 7 P7 0 08 ser Function 8 P7 0 09 ser Function 9 P7 0 10 ser Function 10 P7011 ser Function 11 P7 0 12 ser Function 12 P7 0 13 ser Function 13 P7 0 14 ser Function 14 P7 0 15 ser Function 15 P7 0 16 ser Function 16 P7017 ser Function 17 P7 0 18 ser Function 18 P7 0 19 ser Function 19 P7 0 20 ser Function 20 P7 0 21 ser Function 21 P7 0 22 ser Function 22 P7 0 23 ser Function 23 P7 0 24 ser Function 24 P7 0
123. able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals Terminal Function 9 12 refer to the explanation for Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details 7 Simple PLC Reference PID Reference Value is given by Simple PLC Function PID Reference of the frequency inverter can be switched among 1 16 arbitrary frequency directives the sources hold time and acceleration amp deceleration time of each frequency directive can be set through Function Code 3 0 03 P3 0 50 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 PID Reference Value is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation module Refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 26 P3 2 39 for more details of the operation module The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9 0 46 P9 0 49 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 01 PID Value Reference 000 0 100 0 050 0 When at Function Code P4 0 00 0 PID Reference is determined by the value set by this function code Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value External Terminal VF1 Reference External Terminal VF1 Reference VFI VF2 VF1 VF2 PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference MAX VFI1 VF2 MIN VF1 VF2 Switch of Multiplex Directive PID Feedback Source S ON Gy Eu eS Terminal on the above conditions 9 Operation Result 1 10 Operation Resu
124. above while the asynchronous motor generally selects and uses ABZ incremental encoder and rotary transformer After completing the installation of the encoder the value of Function Code P0 1 27 shall be correctly set based on actual conditions or the frequency inverter may not run normally Note when the open collector type encoder is adopted to r ealize the distance control t he function code must be set to P0 1 26 10 Function Name Setting scope Line Number of Encoder 00001 65535 This function code is used for the number of pulses per revolution to set ABZ or UVW incremental encoder In closed type vector control mode the line number of the encoder must be correctly set or the frequency inverter will not run normally Page 86 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope P0128 Phase sequence of ABZ 0 Forward Direction Incremental Encoder 1 Reverse Direction This function code is only valid for ABZ incremental encoder namely it is valid at PO 1 26 0 and used to set the phase sequence of ABZ Incremental Encoder AB Signal It is valid for synchronous motor and asynchronous motor when the asynchronous motor is completely tuned or the synchronous motor is tuned the AB Phase Sequence is acquired for ABZ Encoder Function code Function Name Setting scope Encoder Disconnection 00 No action Testing Time 00 1s 10 0s When the detection time of the encoder disconne
125. ad Write Abnormity Motor Overheat Larger Speed Deviation Motor Overspeed Initial Position Error Current Detection Fault Contactor Abnormity of Current Detection Fast Current limiting Timeout Motor Switch at Running 24V Power Fault Buffer Resistance Fault Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication SExample E g 1 Forward Start No 1 Frequency inverter The host machine sends data package The slave machine responds the data package ADR CMD ADRESS DATA E g 2 Reference No 1 Frequency inverter Frequency Not store ADR CMD ADRESS DATA The frequency value of Reference 1 Frequency inverter is the highest frequency 100 00 Methods are as below after removal of the decimal point of 100 00 it is 1OOOOD 2710H The host machine sends data package ADR CMD ADRESS DATA Respond the data package ADR CMD ADRESS DATA E g 3 Inquire the running frequency of No 1 Frequency inverter Frequency In running state inquire the Output Frequency of the Frequency inverter 1 Methods are as below the Function Code Parameter No of the output frequency is P9 0 00 after conversion into address it is 9000H If the Output Frequency of the Frequency inverter 1 is 50 00Hz it is 5 0100D 1388H The host machine sends data package The slave mach
126. ad alarm Instantaneous power off Lower than 15 ms Continuous operation Bigger than 15 ms Automatic restart is allowable JUOUIUOITAUY Ambient temperature 10 C 40 C Storage temperature 20 C 65 C Ambient humidity 90 RH in max no dewing Height vibration Below 1 000 m below 5 9m sec 0 6g Application position No corrosive gas inflammable gas oil mist dust and others Cooling Air blast cooling Page 7 Chapter 2 Product Information 2 3 Product List 1 CDI E100 Series Frequency inverter type Rated capacity KVA Rated input current A Rated output current A Matchable Motor kW S2 Single phase 220V 50 60Hz Built in Brake Unit E100GOR4S2B 0 8 5 0 2 0 0 4 E100GOR75S2B 1 5 9 4 0 0 75 2100G1R5S2B 2 7 15 7 130 1 5 E100G2R2S2B 3 8 27 10 0 2 2 T2 Three phase 220V 50 60Hz Built in Brake Unit 210060 0 8 2 3 2 0 0 4 E100G0 1 5 6 4 0 0 75 E100G1 2 7 8 8 7 0 1 5 E100G2 3 8 12 5 T4 Three phase 380V 50 60Hz Built in 10 0 Brake Unit 2 2 3 4 2 3 5 0 3 7 5 8 5 1 Frequency inverter type Rated capacity KVA 10 5 Rated input current A 8 8 Rated output current A Matchable Motor kW
127. ain can be obtained at high frequency The longer the derivative time is the greater the adjusting strength is If speed reduction is to be realized by setting value the setting value 1 of the distance is the speed switch point and the setting value 2 of the distance is the target value When actual distance reaches the setting value 1 of the distance one signal is output to suspend PID Regulation and another one provides a low frequency rate to the frequency inverter Frequency Source B Function code Setting value Function code P3 2 00 00012 MI is determined by Control C P3 2 07 5625 MlI take distance set value 1 arrival signal to be used for PID suspension P3 2 03 00100 M2 take M1 signal P3 2 08 0018 M2 switch Frequency Source B PO 1 00 8 Frequency source is selected by terminal PO 0 05 5 00 Low speed frequency If the distance is required to reach automatic shutdown and the frequency inverter is desired to stop stably the shutdown DC brake can be configured and the following parameters are required to be set as below Function code Setting value Function code Attribution P3 2 00 00212 M3 is determined by Control C P3 2 09 5739 M3 take target length arrival to be used for shutdown of the frequency inverter PO 1 16 5 0 Decelerating time 4 P1 0 17 000 00 Stop DC Braking Initial Frequency
128. al When the time of Timer 1 reaches the time set by Function Code P3 2 24 output Signal ON Timer 2 Timing Arrival When the time of Timer 2 reaches the time set by Function Code P3 2 25 output Signal ON Timer 1 Timing Arrival but Timer 2 Timing Not Arrival When the time of Timer 1 reaches the time set by Function Code P3 2 24 and the time of Timer 2 fails to reach the time set by Function Code P3 2 25 output Signal ON User Function 1 Reservation User Function 2 Reservation User Function 3 Reservation User Function 4 Reservation User Function 5 Reservation Synchronization Intermediate Relay M1 Have the same action with M1 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M2 Have the same action with M2 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M3 Have the same action with M3 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M4 Have the same action with M4 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M5 Have the same action with M5 Distance over Zero When actual distance P9 0 30 is greater than 0 output Signal ON Distance Set value 1 Arrival When actual distance P9 0 30 reaches the distance set by Function Code P3 1 13 output Signal ON Distance Set value 2 Arrival When actual distance P9 0 30 reaches the distance set by Function Code P3 1 14 output Signal ON Operation Result 2 greater than 2 When the result 2 of the operation module is greater
129. al in the frequency inverter or adding an AC reactor optional at the input end can effectively improve the power factors at the power supply side 6 Surge absorber If a perceptual load such as electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve electromagnetic coil electromagnetic brake and so on is connected in the adjacent area a surge suppressor should also be used while operating the frequency inverter 7 Setting of a noise filter at the power supply side Noise filter can be used to reduce the high frequency noise flowing from the frequency inverter to the power supply Wiring example 1 please use noise filters exclusively designed for frequency inverters It is set as follows E Noise filter gt Power supply inverter gt Other devices Frequency c Motor Page 20 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 3 3 Precautions for wiring the output side of the main circuit 1 Connection of the output terminals to the load Connect the output terminals U V and W respectively to the leading out wires U V and W of the motor Use the forward rotation instruction for verification CCW observed from the load side the motor runs counterclockwise If the motor is not running in the right direction switch any two of terminals U V and W 2 It is absolutely forbidden to connect input power supply to terminals U V or W 3 Short c
130. al Input 5 Specific function refers to the description DI6 OP Digital Input 6 for use of Function Code P2 0 00 P2 0 05 DI7 COM Digital Input 7 Refer to the terminal on CDI E180 DI8 COM _ Digital Input 8 Series expansion Card I 0 CDI E180 DI9 COM Digital Input 9 Series hasn t had these terminals Specific function refers to the description for use DI10 COM Digital Input 10 of Function Code P2 0 06 and P2 0 09 TIA Multi functional Relay 1 Output TA TB is normally open TA TC is normally closed Multi functional Multi functional Relay 2 Output Drive Capability AC250V 3A below DC30V_ 3A below Output Terminal CME Multi functional Open Collector Output 1 Refer to the terminal on CDI E180 Series expansion Card I 0 CDI E180 Series hasn t had these terminals Specific Multi functional Open Collector Output 2 function refers to the description for use of Function Code P2 0 28 and P2 0 31 Drive Capability DC48V 50mA below 10V GND 10V Power Output Provide DC 10V supply voltage externally and generally adopt it as working power for external potentiometer Drive Capability 5 0mA below VF1 GND Analog Input Terminal 1 Be used for receiving external analog VF2 GND Page 26 Analog Input Terminal 2 signal input OV 10V voltage signal or 0 4mA 20mA current signal Category Terminal C
131. al Terminal VF2 Reference The upper limit frequency is given by the analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input terminal VF1 VF2 VF1 and VF2 can input 0V 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve of the input of VF1 and VF2 and the upper limit frequency the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 The deviation between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 05 P8 1 12 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference The upper limit frequency is set by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals Terminal Function 9 12 refer to the Description for Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details 4 PULS Reference The upper limit frequency is set by high speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and upper limit frequency can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is linear relationship
132. als is subject to material object Page 11 Chapter 2 Product Information 2 5 Routine maintenance 1 Routine maintenance Under influence of temperature humidity dust and vibration internal elements of frequency inverter should be aged which should cause potential fault or decrease service life of frequency inverter Therefore it is significant to perform routine maintenance and regular inspection with the frequency inverter Routine maintenance item A If running sound of motor is abnormal B If vibration is created during operation of motor C If installing condition of frequency inverter is changed D If radiating fan of frequency inverter works normally E If frequency inverter is in state of overheat Daily cleanness A Keep cleanness of frequency inverter B Remove dust from surface of frequency inverter effectively to prevent frequency inverter from incursion of dust or metal dust C Remove oil sludge form radiating fan of frequency inverter effectively 2 Regular inspection Please inspect corner pockets of frequency inverter regularly Regular inspection item A Inspect air flue and clean it regularly B Inspect if screw is loosened C Inspect if frequency inverter is corrosive D Inspect if there is arc on surface connecting terminal E Insulated test of major loop Note Please disconnect major loop and frequency inverter while testing insulation resistance by using megohmmeter 5
133. alue F If LED state indicator and number keyboard displays correctly 4 3 Operating method of keyboard 4 3 1 Keys on keyboard and their functions 1 CDI E100 Series LED Keyboard FWD 1 Display the setting value of TUNE J every function code When use the parameters kiana 2 Output monitoring value to set the mode read and f GUDE J store the setting parameters Multifunction Key 1 Switch display mode MODE ENTER 9 Gancel data modification Potentiometer adjusts the frequency 1 Monitoring mode and scroll display s of the data 1 Function Code Option A y 2 When selecting and setting the 2 Data Setting parameters move the position of the data 3 When presetting the modification keyboard frequency set the Stop Fault Reset Key frequency Run Key Installation Dimension of Operation Keyboard Function of Indicator Description of Function 99mm When rotating in the f orward direction the indicator lights up but when rotating in the backward direction the indicator doesn t work FWD eg 3 0 0 8 RUN When the parameter identification function operates the light flickers The light is normally on at torque MODE ENTER JOG ww 0zZ control mode The frequency inverter lights up under running state A v Indicate voltage value Indicate current value Indicate frequency Indicate percentage Indicate rotatin
134. ameter Group Ones 0 Only display basic group 1 Display the menus at all levels Tens 0 Don t display Group P7 1 Display Group P7 2 Reservation Hundreds 0 Don t display parameter group 1 Display correction parameter group Thousands 0 Don t display code group 1 Display code group Ten Thousands Reservation correction Function Password Protection 0 Modifiable 1 Non modifiable 2 Allowable Modification to GP Type Parameter Initialization 00 No Operation 01 Clearance Information 09 Reset to Factory Parameter excluding motor parameter correction group password group 19 Reset to Factory Parameter excluding motor parameter password group 30 Users Current Parameter Backup 60 Reset Parameters 100 999 Reset to User Factory Parameters of Record to User Backup User Password 00000 65535 Group P 5 1 Expansion Group Accumulative Running Time 00000h 65000h Accumulative Power On Time 00000h 65000h Accumulative Power Consumption 00000 Kilowatt 65000 Kilowatt Module Temperature 000 C 100 C Hardware Version No 180 00 Software Version No 001 00 Page 64 Program Nonstandard Label 0000 9999 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 7 Group P6 Fault Display and Protection Function code Factory Value Function name Setting scope Group P6 0 Fault Display Group
135. amp B Standby Frequency Source 1 Stan requency Source 2 8 Switch of Terminal among the above 8 kinds Option of Frequency Source B 0 Keyboard Reference No Power off Memory 1 Keyboard Reference Power off Memory 2 Keyboard Reference 3 External Reference 4 External Reference 5 PULS Reference DI6 6 Multiplex Directive Reference Simple PLC Reference PID Control Reference Communication Reference Potentiometer VFI VF2 Terminal Terminal 0 Operation Result 1 1 Operation Result 2 2 Operation Result 3 3 Operation Result 4 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 Adjustment_ Volume of Fr quency Source B at superposition 000 150 Page 43 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Factory i Setting scope Function name g SCOP wane Digital Reference P0 0 08 External Terminal VFI Reference External Terminal VF2 Reference Multiplex Directive Reference PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference Operation Result 1 eration Result 2 Operation Result 3 Operation Result 4 Upper Limit Frequency Source SIONS PO 1 04 bad Limit Frequency 1999 09 Highest Frequency sel Keyboard Reference n P0 1 05 fener Shut down o No Memory Memory Selection 1 Memory Keyboard Reference P0 1 06 frequency Action Bench Running Frequency ark at running 1 Reference frequency Benchmark frequency of 0 Highest Frequency P0 1 0
136. an be adopted that is YO1 and Yo2 Name of Function Tenni Code Configuration Description for Output E180 Expansion YO P2 0 28 Card Transistor drive capability 48VDC 50mA below 7 E Series Control Relay drive capability 250V AC 3Abelow or 30 TE Relay P2 0 29 Panel VDC 1A below E Series Control Relay drive capability 250V AC 3A below or 30 Panel VDC 1A below T2 Relay P2 0 30 YO2 P2 0 31 618 Expansion Transistor drive capability 48VDC 50mA below FMP YO FMP P2 0 35 E Series Control Transistor able to output high frequency impulse 0 01 P2 1 20 0 P2 1 21 Panel kHz 100kHz drive capability 24VDC 50mA below YO YO FMP P2 1 20 1 P2 0 32 aed Control Transistor drive capability 48VDC 50mA below Output Terminal YO T1 and T2 can also be used to set the delay effect time through Function Code P2 1 29 P2 1 31 and available for the occasions that require to delay the signal effect t T T Setting for Terminal es Delay Time i i i 1 YO P2 1 29 ORAO D E 1 T1 P2130 T2 P2131 i t 7 Generation Output Time Time Point of Point of Output Output Signal Signal T is the delayed time Page 180 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 19 Communication of Upper Computer As the automation control is more widely used the applications on controlling the running of the frequency inverter the upper
137. arameter Identification Control Modes include Static Identification Complete Identification Load Synchronous Machine Identification and Non load Synchronous Machine Identification As for Parameter Identification Control of the asynchronous motor it suggests using the Complete Identification Mode at on load run P0 0 24 2 Identification Effect Parameter Identification Control Mode Applicable Occasions Only applicable for occasions not convenient to separate Static Identification Worse the motor and rotating system from asynchronous motor Complete Identification Only applicable for occasion the motor and rotating system s able to completely separate from asynchronous motor Best Load Synchronous Machine Identification Only applicable for occasion the motor and rotating system s not convenient to separate from synchronous motor Not bad Only applicable for occasions able to completely separate the motor and rotating system from synchronous motor Non load Synchronous Machine Identification Best As for the occasions hard to separate the asynchronous motor and rotating system the motor with same brand and type can be used after complete identification the parameters for properties of the motor are copied to corresponding parameter of P0 0 19 P0 0 23 Function code Function name Setting scope 00 No action 01 Static identification 02 Complete identification Paramet
138. arger power Motor overload Motor and current exceed the rated current Check the protection parameter P1 0 25 Reference of the motor is proper Check whether the motor is in locked rotor conditions or the load to motor needs to be reduced Correctly preset the rated current of the motor Replace the frequency inverter with larger power Missing phase Error of missing phase or unbalanced three phases Check main circuit voltage whether it is missing phase or unbalanced three phases Check whether the connecting terminal is loosing Seek technical support Page 209 Chapter 9 Fault Handling Fault display Description Details Fault elimination Err21 User Defined Fault 1 Fault 1 Signal given by the users through multi functional terminals or PLC Programming Function Check whether the User Defined Fault 1 is removed and then run after reset User Defined Fault 2 Fault 2 Signal given by the users through multi functional terminals or PLC Programming Function Check whether the User Defined Fault 2 is removed and then run after reset Accumulative Power on Time Arrival Refer to the time given by accumulative power on time arrival P5 1 01 of the frequency inverter Use the parameter initialization function to clear the record information Accumulative Running Time Arrival Refer to the time given by accumulative
139. at fault Power on Time 1 when at P6 0 09 fault Running Time 1 when at P6 0 10 Aat S P6 0 11 Fault Frequency 2 P6 0 12 Fault Current 2 Bus Voltage 2 when at P6 0 13 Fault 5 Input Terminal State 2 P6 0 14 when at fault Output Terminal State 2 P6 0 15 when at fault Frequency inverter State 2 P6 0 16 when at fault Power on Time 2 when at P6 0 17 fault Running Time 2 when at P6 0 18 fault P6 0 19 Fault Frequency 3 P6 0 20 Fault Current 3 Bus Voltage 3 when at P6 0 21 faat o S eae ae eae P6 0 23 Oupa Terminal State 3 P6 0 24 Frequency inverter State 3 P6 0 25 Poweron Time 3 when at P6 0 26 Runne Time 3 when at Group 6 1 Protection Control Group Input Default Phase z ihi P6 1 00 Peton 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed P6 1 01 Output Default Phase 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Overvoltage Stall Protection Sensitivity Overvoltage Stall Protection Voltage Point Overcurrent Stall Protection Sensitivity 0 100 Overcurrent Stall P6 1 05 Protection current 100 200 P6 1 06 Fault Auto Reset Number 0 20 Waiting Interval Time of P6 1 07 Ratt Ante Reset 0 1s 100 0s P6 1 02 0 100 P6 1 03 120 150 P6 1 04 Xe e Me Me Me fe oe Page 66 Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope Fault Protective Action Selection 1 0 Free St
140. ation 4 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number of Input B Operation 4 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 4 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number The above function codes are used to set the input address and setting coefficient of Operation 4 Setting Coefficient of Operation 4 00000 65535 Refer to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 28 P3 2 30 for more details Page 132 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 5 GROUP P4 PID CONTROLAND COMMUNICATION CONTROL P4 0 PID Control Group Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value Digital Reference P4 0 01 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference External Terminal VF1 Reference External Terminal VF2 Reference PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference PID Reference Source Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference 7 Simple PLC Reference 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 0 Digital Reference P4 0 01 PID Reference Value is determined by the value by Function Code P4 0 01 1 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference PID Reference Value is determined by Keyboard Potentiometer 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Term
141. ation diagram of E180 and E100 Communication Setting set based on actual conditions Communication Baud Rate P4 1 00 p Data format P4 1 01 Protocol Expansion Card 3 a te Local format P4 1 02 PA MODBUS RTU ASCII for PISO on Ba Response delay P 1 03 Communication Upper SG veal y e Communication Timeout Function Computer SG ba P4 1 04 Data Transmission Format P4 1 05 Communication Setting set based on actual conditions Communication Baud Rate P4 1 00 Protocol E100 Data format P4 1 01 Frequency Local format P4 1 02 MODBUS RTU ASCII jodie Response delay P4 1 03 Communication Upper SG Communication Timeout Function Computer Ge P4 1 04 Data Transmission A Format P4 1 05 Page 181 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 20 Parameter Identification When the control mode of the frequency inverter is vector control mode P0 0 02 1 or 2 the accuracy for the parameters of motor of P0 0 19 P0 0 23 directly effects the control performance of the frequency inverter if the frequency inverter has good control performance and running efficiency the frequency inverter must acquire the accurate parameters of the controlled motor If exact parameters of motor have been acquired the parameters of motor can be manually input into PO 0 19 P0 0 23 or the Parameter Identification Control Function is required to be used The P
142. ation with three decimals 4 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with four decimals 5 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division without decimal 6 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with one decimal 7 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with two decimals 8 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with three decimals 9 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with four decimals Ones Operation 1 Tens Operation 2 Hundreds Operation 3 Thousands Operation 4 Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope Input A of Operation 1 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 1 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Input B of Operation 1 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 1 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Setting Coefficient of Operation 1 00000 65535 Input A of Operation 2 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 4 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Input B of Operation 2 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones e
143. attribution Operation Result 2 Operation Result 3 P3 0 50 Phase 15 attribution A Operation Result 4 P3 0 51 Simple PLC Running Time Unit 0 Second 1 Hour we xb xe Jab e xe ob fe fx fot foe xt ok fot fot ot fot fot ot dat fat fot ot ot a Gr oup P3 1 Expansion Group P3 1 00 Timing Function Selection 0 Invalid 1 Valid Fixed Running Time Selection 0 Digital Reference P3 1 02 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference Analog input range corresponds to P3 1 02 gt Fixed Running Time 0000 0min 6500 0min Wobbulating Reference Mode 0 Relative to Reference frequency 1 Relative to Highest Frequency Wobbulating Range 000 0 100 0 Kicking Range 00 0 50 0 Wobbulating Cycle 0000 1s 3000 0s Page 55 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope P3 1 07 Rise Time of Wobbulating Triangular Wave 000 1 100 0 X P3 1 08 Reference Length 00000m 65535m P3 1 09 Actual Length 00000m 65535m P3 1 10 Impulse Count per meter 0000 1 6553 5 P3 1 11 Reference Count Value 00001 65535 P3 1 12 Designated Count Value 00001 65535 P3 1 13 Distance Set value 1 3200 0 3200 0 P3 1 14 Distance Set value 2 320
144. ble frequency motor uses forced air cooling so that radiating effect is not affected by the rotating speed Hence it is not required to lower protection threshold when running at low speed 2 Synchronous Motor If it is synchronous motor the control mode is set to closed loop vector control i e PO 0 02 2 CDI E100 Series can t support synchronous motor Factory Value Function Name Setting scope Motor rated power 0000 1kKW 1000 0kW Machine type 000 01Hz Highest frequency 050 00 Motor rated frequency Motor rated voltage 0001V 2000V Machine type Motor rated current 000 01 655 35 Machine type Motor Rated Rotating Speed 00001 65535 Machine type Stator resistance 00 001 65 535 Machine type Rotor resistance 00 001 65 535 Machine type 000 01 655 35 Motor leakage inductance Machine type Motor common inductance 0000 1 6553 5 Machine type Non load current 000 01 Motor rated current Machine type The above parameters are intrinsic parameters of AC asynchronous motor no matter what is adopted V F control or vector control all have certain requirements to the parameters of the motor especially for vector control it requires that value of P0 0 19 P0 0 23 must be very close to the intrinsic parameters of the motor the more the precision of the value is the better the performance of the vector control is therefore when using the vector control it is better to identify the mo
145. board frequency set the frequency Running Indicator Stop Fault Reset Key Run Key 72mm WWg9E ww th 68mm Page 37 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 3 2 Data Monitoring Mode 1 Cycle Monitor Mode In Monitor Mode press Key gt gt per time and change one display item to check current state information of the frequency inverter Press Key gt gt LED Shutdown LED Shutdown Press Key gt gt Monitoring Content 1 Monitoring Content 2 LED Shutdown Monitoring Content 3 LED Shutdown Monitoring Content 16 Press Key gt gt In shut down state the contents for 16 downtimes can be cycled at most and specific contents shown in the cycle shall be determined by Function Code P5 0 05 Details refer to the Description for P5 0 05 Press Key gt gt LED Run Monitoring LED Run Monitoring Press Key gt gt Content 1 Content 2 LED Run Monitoring Content 3 LED Run Monitoring Content 32 Press Key gt gt Under running state the contents for 32 running surveillance can be cycled at most and specific contents shown in the cycle shall be determined by Function Code P5 0 02 and PS 0 03 Details refer to the Description for P5 0 02 and P5 0 03 2 Fault Alarm Monitor Mode A Under state of running monitor the unit should display information relating to fault and warning if fault and alarm oc
146. c When the output signal is valid the multi functional output terminal is connected But When the output signal is invalid the multi functional output terminal is disconnected 1 Negative Logic When the output signal is invalid the multi functional output terminal is connected But when the output signal is valid the multi functional output terminal is disconnected Function code Function name Setting scope VFI Terminal Function as 00 Use as Normal Analog P2 1 23 Digital Input 01 59 Digital Input Terminal Function VF2 Terminal Function as 00 Use as Normal Analog fees Digital Input 01 59 Digital Input Terminal Function This group of function codes is used to set the functions when the analog input terminal VF is used as digital input terminal DI When VF is used as DI VF and 10V are connected VF Terminal State is high level when VF and 10V are disconnected and VF Terminal State is low level the setting refers to the use and Description of the functions refer to Function Code P2 0 00 P2 0 09 Function code Function name Setting scope 0 Active High Level P2 1 25 Valid State Option of VF ae reel Level Tens VF2 This function code is used to confirm that the analog input terminal VF is used as digital input terminal DI VF Terminal State is active high level or active low level Ones and Tens respectively represent VF1 and VF2 Active High Level the connection of VF and 10V is valid but
147. cation If it is set at 0 0 the communication timeout is invalid Page 200 3Description for Standard MODBUS Communication Format 3 1String Structure 8 N 2 P4 1 01 0 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication Start bit 0 3 4 Stop bit Stop bit lt as Start Bit Data Bit Stop Bit Stop Bit 8 E 1 P4 1 01 1 Start bit 0 3 4 Even parity Stop bit la pit wit mit gt Start Bit Data Bit Even Parity Stop Bit Verification 8 O 1 P4 1 01 2 Start bit 0 3 4 Odd parity Stop bit la pit Pit rit gt Start Bit Data Bit Odd Parity Stop Bit Verification 8 N 1 P4 1 01 3 Start bit 0 3 4 7 Stop bit ng pit pit gt Start Bit Data Bit Stop Bit Page 201 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication 3 2Communication Data Structure Slave Machine Frequency inverter Address The address scope of the frequency inverter is 001 249 8 digit hexadecimal number Note When the address is ADR 000H it is valid for all slave machines and all slave machines can t respond message broadcast mode Function Code of Data Package 06 write the contents of a register 03 read out the contents of one or more than one register s 8 digit hexadecimal number Sending of Host Machine when at Fu
148. cation Group Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 1200 2400 4800 Baud Rate 9600 19200 38400 57600 No Verification 8 N 2 Daa Tomat Even Parity Verification 8 E 1 Odd Parity Verification 8 0 1 No Verification 8 N 1 000 Broadcast Address Local Machine Address 001 249 Response Delay 00 20ms 00 0 Invalid 00 1s 60 0s 0 ASCII Mode Reservation 1 RTU Mode Communication Timeout Data Transmission Format When E Series inverter realizes the communication with other equipments through communication terminal RS 485 it is required to set the above function codes Refer to Communication RS 485 of E Series Frequency inverter in Chapter VIII for more details Page 139 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 6 Group P5 Keyboard Display P5 0 Basic Group Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Invalid Keyboard JOG Key Function 1 Forward Jogging Reference 2 Reverse Jogging 3 Forward and Reverse Switch This function code is used to set the function of Multi functional Key JOG When at P5 0 00 0 the function of Key JOG is invalid When at P5 0 00 1 the function of Key JOG is forward jogging function When at P5 0 00 2 the function of Key JOG is reverse jogging function When at P5 0 00 3 the function of Key JOG is forward and reverse switch function Note Forward Jogging Function and Reserve Jo
149. ce to adopt dynamic braking the frequency inverters with power above 15kW can adopt dynamic braking only when they are configured with brake units and brake resistance Refer to Appendix A2 5 for externally configured brake units and brake resistance Output Frequency Factory Value p1 0 16 0 Shutdown by Deceleration Factory Value P1 0 17 0Hz Shutdown DC P1 0 18 0s Brake Waiting P1 0 19 0 Time P1 0 20 0s Set Frequency P1 0 17 DC Brake Time Shutdown DC Brake __ NN Start Frequency Deceleration Time Shutdown Command Free Stop Set P1 0 16 1 After the stop command is effective the frequency inverter immediately terminates the output and the motor stop freely by mechanical inertia The users haven t had the stop requirements for load or when the load itself has the brake function the function of free stop can be selected Output Frequency A P1 0 16 1 Free Stop Set Frequency Shutdown of Load Speed upon Inertia Stop Command Page 162 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 3 Acceleration and Deceleration Mode Different load characteristics have different requirements for acceleration and deceleration time E Series Frequency inverter provides three kinds of acceleration and deceleration modes Straight Line Curve S 1 and Curve S 2 which are selected through Function Code P0 1 19 Additionally the acceleration and deceleration time unit can be adjus
150. celeration Install additional brake unit and brake resistance her the input voltage is Over voltage at deceleration When the frequency inverter runs at constant speed DC voltage of the main circuit exceeds this set value The detected overvoltage value is the same as above Check whe too high Check whether the bus voltage display is normal Delay the deceleration time Check whether the motor is dragged to run by external force in the process of deceleration Install additional brake unit and brake resistance her the input voltage is Module fault External fault has triggered automatic module protection Check the coil resistance of the motor Check the isolation of the motor Damage by inverse module breakdown Under voltage in the main circuit check the electric level Detected DC undervoltage value Level T2 190V Level T4 380V Level T6 700V Check the lines of supply power contact well Check whether the incoming voltage is within regulated scope Check whether there is momentary interruption Check whether the display of the bus voltage is normal Check whether the setting bridge and charge resistance are normal Frequency Tdndetew oltage overloaded Motor and current exceed the rated load Check whether the motor is in locked rotor conditions or the load to motor needs to be reduced Replace the frequency inverter with l
151. ck Frequency for Abnormality Backup Frequency for Abnormality 000 0 100 0 Action Selection for Momentary Interruption 0 Invalid 1 Deceleration 2 Stop by Deceleration Judgment Time of Momentary Interruption Voltage Recovery 000 00s 100 00s Voltage Judgment for Momentary Interruption Action 60 0 100 0 Voltage Standard Bus Voltage Judgment for Suspension of Momentary Action 80 0 100 0 Standard Bus Voltage Off load Selection Protection 0 Valid 1 Invalid Off load Detection Level 000 0 100 0 Off load Detection Time 00 0s 60 0s Overspeed Detection 00 0 50 0 Overspeed Detection Time 00 0 No Detection 00 1s 60 0s Speed Deviation greater than Detection Value 00 0 50 0 Speed Deviation greater than Detection Time 00 0 No Detection 00 1s 60 0s Fault Output Terminal Action Selection during Fault Auto Reset Period 0 No Action 1 Action Page 68 Input Default Phase Protection Sensitivity 01 10 The smaller it is the more sensitivity it is Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 8 Group P7 User Function Customization Function code Function name Setting scope Group P7 0 Basic Group P7 0 00 ser Function 0 U0 0 01 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 U
152. ct especially for rated current of the motor Fault display Description Details Chapter 9 Fault Handling Fault elimination Current Detection Fault Circuit fault after current detection Check whether the Hall device has defaults Check whether the circuit has fault after detection of the driver board Check whether the driver board has fault Contactor Abnormal power supply of driver board caused by the fault of the contactorl Check whether the contactor is normal Check whether the power supply of the driver board is normal Abnormity of Current Detection Circuit fault after current detection leads to abnormal current detection value Check whether the Hall device has defaults Check whether the circuit has fault after detection of the driver board Check whether the driver board has fault Fast Current limiti ng Timeout The running current of the frequency inverter continues to be larger which exceeds allowable currentlimit time Check whether the load is too large or is stalled Check whether the size of the frequency inverter is too small Motor Switch at Running Conduct motor switch in the running process of the frequency inverter Conduct the switch operation of the motor after shutdown of the frequency inverter Power Fault External 24V power supply is short circuit or the load of External 24V power supply is too lar
153. ction fault is set to 00 0 the frequency inverter can t detect the disconnection fault of encoder When the frequency inverter has detected the disconnection fault and the duration is over the time set by Function Code P0 1 29 the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err25 PO 1 29 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value Stator Resistance of i P0 1 30 00 001 65 535 Machine type Synchronous Machine Back EMF of Synchronous A PO 1 31 0000 0 6553 5 Machine type Machine The above parameters are intrinsic parameters of synchronous motor the load motor equipped with the frequency inverter refers to synchronous motor it requires that value of PO 1 30 P0 1 31 must be very close to the intrinsic parameters of the motor the more the precision of the value is the better the performance of the vector control is The motor parameters are identified through Function Code P0 0 24 If the identification cannot be made on site according to the parameters provided by the motor manufacturer it is to input them into the above corresponding function code Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Fi d Directi P0 1 32 UVW Phase Sequence S Machine type 1 Reverse Direction P0 1 33 UVW Encoder Angle 000 0 359 9 Machine type The above function codes are only valid when the synchronous motor adopts UVW incremental encoder These two parameters are more important for the
154. curs B Reset fault by press STOP RESET if fault disappears C Please cut off power supply and reset the unit if serious fault occurs D Keyboard should display fault code continuously until fault is eliminated refer to Chapter IX 4 3 3 Use of Multi Function Key JOG Upon the demand of the users set Function Code P5 0 00 and realize the definition of the users to Function Key JOG and the Key JOG can choose dead and forward rotation jogging running reverse rotation jogging running and switch between forward rotation and reverse rotation in which forward rotation jogging running and reverse rotation jogging running are valid under any running control and the switch between forward rotation and reverse rotation is only valid under keyboard control mode Page 38 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 3 4Parameter check and set methods using digital keyboard Running under monitoring Press down MODE key to Parameter setting mode the keyboard shall display parameter code like P0 0 00 Example the following is an example to change value of P0 0 10 from 010 0 to 016 1 S MODE keyto enter parameter setting mode 50 00 Press gt gt key to move the erona A V to change parameter code f r example change to P0 0 00 y Parameter P0 0 00 appears at the same time thepointer points tothe last digital bit 0 and twinkles Press gt gt toselect parameter codet
155. curve Actual Analog Output Standard Analog Output X Analog Output Gain Analog Output Offset Standard Analog Output refers to the output analog value without offset and gain correction Group P2 1 Expansion Group Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Active High Level 1 Active Low Level Ones DI Tens DI2 Hundreds DI3 Thousands DI4 Ten Thousands DIS 0 Active High Level 1 Active Low Level Ones DI6 Tens DI7 Invalid E100 Valid Model Selection 1 of Terminal DI Valid Model Selection 2 of Terminal DI Hundreds DI8 Invalid E100 Thousands DI9 Invalid E100 Ten Thousands DI10 Invalid E100 Be used for setting valid state mode of digital input terminal When selecting active high level it is not valid until corresponding Terminal DI is connected and the disconnection is invalid When selecting active low level it is not valid until corresponding Terminal DI is connected and the disconnection is invalid Note DI7 DI10 are the terminals of CDI E180 Series on Expansion Card I 0 but invalid for CDI E100 Series Page 112 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope Function code Function Name Ones Curve Selected for VFI Tens Curve Selected for VF2 1 Curve 1 2 Curve 2 3 Curve 3 4 Curve 4 Analog Input Curve Selection The ones and tens of this function code are respectively used to select corresponding given curve of analog Two analog inp
156. d Application Case Setting scope Factory Value P3 1 03 Wobbulating Reference Mode 0 Relative to Reference frequency 1 Relative to Highest Frequency 0 P3 1 04 Wobbulating Range 000 0 100 0 P3 1 05 Kicking Range 00 0 50 0 P3 1 06 Wobbulating Cycle 0000 1s 3000 0s Rise Time of Wobbulating Triangular Wave P3 1 07 000 1 100 0 In some occasions the Wobbulation can improve the control performance of the equipments e g winding equipments in textile fiber etc the use of the Wobbulating Function can improve the uniform tightness of the winding of spindle Through setting Function Code P3 1 03 P3 1 07 it is to realize the reference frequency as wobbulating performance of the central frequency The Function Code P3 1 03 is used to confirm the reference quantity of amplitude The Function Code P3 1 04 is used to determine the size of the amplitude The Function Code P3 1 05 is used to confirm the size of mutation frequency of the wobbulation When at P3 1 03 0 the amplitude is variable amplitude system in relative to reference frequency which will change along the reference frequency Amplitude Reference Frequency X Amplitude of Wobbulation Mutation Frequency Reference Frequency X Amplitude of Wobbulation X Sudden Jump of Amplitude When at P3 1 03 1 the amplitude is fixed amplitude system in relative to reference frequency which is a fixed amplitude Amplitude Reference
157. d deviation caused by the increase of load Hopping Frequency Prevent resonance from occurring with load Sagged Function Balance the load of multiple motors with same load Timing Control Be able to realize automatic shutdown of the frequency inverter when reaching given time Built in Virtual Delay Relay Realize simple logic Programming to multi functional output terminal function and digital input terminal signal the logic results can not only be equivalent to digital input terminal function but can be output through multi functional terminal output Built in Timer Built in 2 timers and acquire the timing input signal to realize timing signal output Use alone or in combination Operation Module Built in Operation Module One built in 4 way Operation Module to realize simple addition subtraction multiplication and division size judgment and integral operation 6 way Digital Input Terminal DI1 DI6 in which D16 can access to high speed Impulse Input 2 way Analog Input Terminal VF1 VF2 which can be used as voltage OV 10V or current 0 4mA 20m lt A input It can be used as Digital Input Terminal through reference Input Terminal 6 way Digital Input Terminal DI1 DI6 in which DI6 can access to high speed Impulse Input Through external I O expansion card it can be expanded to 4 way DI7 DI10 2 way Analog Input Terminal VF1 VF2 which can be used as voltage OV 10V or current
158. d on actual needs which is the percentage relative to P4 0 04 PID Feedback Source The feedback source inputs from Terminal Vfl PID Action Direction PID Direct Action The feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Reverse Action The smaller the feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Action Direction Set based on actual feedback range 1000 means IMPa PID Reference Display Value Display PID Reference PID Feedback Display Value Page 184 Display PID Feedback Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Function Factory code Function name UNE p2 1 02 Analog Input Curve 4441 Define VF1 Select Curve 1 Selection P2 0 13 Minimum Input of 00 00V Curve 1 Description Corresponding reference P2 0 14 for Minimum Input of 000 0 Curve 1 Define the relation curve between VF1 P2 0 15 Maximum Input of 19 ggy Input and PID Feedback Curve 1 Corresponding reference P2 0 16 for Maximum Input of 100 0 Curve 1 When the site analog is easily interrupted please increase the filtering time to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the longer the filtering time is the response speed to the analog detection gets slow as the filtering time become longer VFI Filtering time The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is the larger the adjustment volume is and the faster the response is but th
159. de from operation instructions this manual also presents some wiring diagrams for your reference If you have any difficulty or special demands for using the frequency inverter please contact our offices or distributors You may also contact the customer service centre of our head office for our quality service The manual noted that its content might change without further notice Please confirm following content during unpackaging 1 If the product is damaged during process of transportation if parts are damaged and dropped or if main body is bruised 2 If rated value marked on nameplate is consistent with your order requirement or if there are ordered Unit acceptance certificate operation manual and guarantee shed in package The Company strictly complies with quality system during production and packaging for any inspection miss please contact our Company or supplier for settlement Warning People should not reprint transmit and use the manual or content relating to it without written permission of the Company who will assume legal responsibility for damage caused in violation of the item IV Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices Please read the manual carefully before install operate maintain or check E Series Frequency inverter To protect yourself the equipment and the property from any possible harm please do read this chapter before using our E Series
160. decimal fractions to system by multiplication algorithm 3 Conduct setting at three decimal fractions to system by multiplication algorithm 4 Conduct setting at four decimal fractions to system by multiplication algorithm 5 Conduct setting at no decimal fraction to system by division algorithm 6 Conduct setting at one decimal fractions to system by division algorithm 7 Conduct setting at two decimal fractions to system by division algorithm 8 Conduct setting at three decimal fractions to system by division algorithm Conduct setting at four decimal fractions to system by division algorithm Ones Operation 1 Tens Operation 2 Hundreds Operation 3 Thousands Operation 4 by The scope of the operation results is not certainly equal to the setting scope of the function codes of the frequency inverter so a setting coefficient is required to set the scope of the operation results to the setting scope of the function codes of the frequency inverter This function code is used to set the functions of the setting coefficient The ones tens hundreds and thousands of this function code respectively correspond to one way operation Refer to the Description of 7 1 14 for more details Internal Operation Function Page 130 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Input A of Operation 1 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Opera
161. desired scope of operation results is 0 1000 For the scope of reference voltage of VF1 and VF2 is 00 00 10 00m the scope of the non setting operation results of Operation 2 is 0 2000 but the desired scope of operation results can be reached through division by two The parameters of the function code are required to be set as below Function code Function name Setting value Explanation Torque Reference Source from Operation P1 1 14 Torque Reference Source 9 Result 2 P3 2 26 Operation Module Select addition operation for operation 2 Operation Setting Operate the setting coefficient by division Coefficient Property without decimals Operate corresponding Function Code P9 0 09 by unsigned number P3 2 27 P3 2 31 Input A of Operation 2 Operate corresponding Function Code P3 2 32 Input B of Operation 2 P9 0 10 by unsigned number Setting Coefficient of P3 2 33 Operation 2 The setting coefficient is 2 7 1 15 PID FUNCTION E Series Frequency inverter has built in PID Regulator which is configured with the option for signal reference channel and signal feedback channel the users can easily realize automatic regulation of process control and control applications on constant voltage constant flow constant temperature tension etc When in use of PID Frequency Closed loop Control the users need to preset the running frequency and reference mode and select P0 0 04 as 8 PID Control that is PID Aut
162. direct start speed tracking start and start after brake Direct Start Set P1 0 10 0 The frequency inverter starts according to given start frequency P1 0 12 and start frequency hold time P1 0 13 and then speeds up to the reference frequency according to the selected acceleration time Page 160 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Output Frequency P1 0 10 0 Direct Start Set Frequency Factory Value P1 0 12 00 00Hz P1 0 13 000 0s Start Frequency Time gt Running Command Hold Time Acceleration of Start Time Frequency Speed Tracking Start Set P1 0 10 1 The frequency inverter starts the speed tracking according to the speed tracking mode given by speed tracking mode P1 0 11 to track the running speed of the motor at which the frequency inverter starts until being accelerated or decelerated to reference frequency When the motor hasn t stopped stably or is unable to stop this function shall be adopted Output Frequency P1 0 10 1 Speed Tracking Start Load Motor Acceleration i Time Time Set Frequency gt Automatic Speed Running Tracking Detection Command Speed Tracking Start Set P1 0 10 2 Before starting the motor normally the frequency converter firstly deploys DC braking in accordance with the data set up in the parameters about starting DC braking current P1 0 14 and starting DC braking time P1 0 15 If t
163. djusted through Function Code P8 1 00 P8 1 04 3 External Terminal VF1 Reference 4 External Terminal VF2 Reference The reference frequency is given by the analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input terminal VF1 VF2 VF1 and VF2 can input 0V 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve between the input of Vfl and VF2 and the reference frequency the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 The deviation between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 05 P8 1 12 Page 74 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 5 PULS Reference Di6 The frequency reference is given by high speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and torque upper limit value can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is line relationship 6 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference The reference frequency is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is able to s
164. dopt PID Parameter 2 Speed Control Torque Control Switch Realize the switch of the frequency inverter between torque contro 1 mode and speed control mode This terminal state is invalid the frequency inverter runs in setting mode of P1 1 13 Speed Torque Control Mode when this terminal state is valid it is switched to another mode Emergency Stop When this terminal is valid the frequency inverter outputs the voltage in enclosed mode and freely stops by inertia Deceleration DC Brake When the terminal state is valid the frequency inverter slows down to Start Frequency of Stop DC Brake and then is switched to Stop DC Brake State User Defined Fault ll User Defined Fault 2 When User Defined Fault 1 and 2 are valid the frequency inverter respectively give an alarm of Err21 and Err22 and then the faults are handled based on fault protection action mode Running Time Reset During the running process it is to conduct reset handling for current running time current running time can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 23 Timer Input Terminal 1 When internal timer is controlled by this terminal this terminal controls the start or stop of the timer refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 23 Timer Input Terminal 2 When internal timer is controlled by this terminal this terminal controls the start or stop of the timer refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 23
165. e lt when use the parameters to set the mode read and store the setting parameters ion Code Opi O 1 Function Code Option lt gt 6 1 Monitoring mode and scroll display of the 2 Data Setting data 3 When presetting the Props RUNS 2 When selecting and setting the parameters keyboard frequency set the CHE 8 o move the position of the data modification frequency Stop Fault Reset Key Gaienachent ultifunction Key Run Key 59mm wwgz wwz 55mm Statement the maximum four lines can be simultaneously displayed under surveillance screen Specific displayed contents are determined by Function Code P5 0 06 P5 0 13 Details refer to the Description for P5 0 06 P5 0 13 Press Key gt gt and select one line If the parameter attribute is writable press Key ENTER and directly enter into parameter modification page after completing the modification press ENTER and return to surveillance screen Page 36 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 5 CDI E180 Series 11 75kW LCD Keyboard Monitoring window displays four lines at most When use the parameters to set the mode read and store the setting parameters 1 Switch display mode Multifunction Key 2 Cancel data modification 1 Monitoring mode and scroll display of the data 1 Function Code Option 2 When selecting and setting the 2 Data Setting parameters move the position of the data 3 When presetting the modification key
166. e 3 93 otor Overloa P1 0 25 Protection Level 00 20 10 00 01 00 x Motor Overload Alarm P1 0 26 System 050 100 080 Group P1 1 Extension Group Broken Line V F Point 1 P1 1 00 Frequency 000 00Hz P1 1 02 000 00 Broken Line V F Point 1 P1 1 01 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 Broken Line V F Point 2 P1 1 02 Frequency P1 1 00 P1 1 04 000 00 Broken Line V F Point 2 94 P1 1 03 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 P1 1 04 Sa VIF Point 3 P1 1 02 Motor rated frequency 000 00 Broken Line V F Point 3 P1 1 05 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 P1 1 06 V F Overexcited Gain 000 200 064 xk 0 Digital Reference P1 1 08 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference 4 PULS Reference DI6 P1 1 07 peor Control Torque 5 Communication Reference 00 x 95 pper Frequency 6 MIN VF1 VF2 7 MAX VFI VF2 8 Operation Result 3 9 Operation Result 4 10 Standby Torque Source 1 11 Standby Torque Source 2 P1 1 08 Torque Upper Limit Reference 000 0 200 0 150 0 x P1 1 09 Inversion Control Enable 0 Allow 1 Prohibit 0 x 96 P1 1 10 Forward and Reverse Dead Time OO000 0s 3000 0s 0000 0 ox P1 1 11 Power on Running Selection 0 Running 1 Not Running 0 Xk 97 Page 46 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code P1 1 12 Droop Control 00 00Hz 10 00Hz Function name Setting scope Speed Torque Control 0 Speed Control Mode Selection 1 Torque Control
167. e 3 when at Fault P6 0 22 Input Terminal State 3 when at fault Same as P6 0 03 P6 0 10 P6 0 23 Output Terminal State 3 when at fault P6 0 24 Frequency inverter State 3 when at fault P6 0 25 Power on Time 3 when at fault P6 0 26 Running Time 3 when at fault P6 1 Protection Control Group Function code Function Name Setting scope P6 1 00 Input Default Phase Protection 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed This function code is used to set whether the frequency inverter protects the input default phase When at P6 1 00 0 the frequency inverter can t provide protection to input default phase When at P6 1 00 1 if the input default phase or three phase input imbalance is detected out the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err11 The allowable degree of three phase input imbalance is determined by Function Code P6 1 26 the higher the value is the duller the response is and the higher the allowed degree of three phase imbalance is Attention shall be paid that if the frequency inverter cannot operate or the load of the motor is lighter even the setting value of P6 1 26 is set smaller it is possible that no alarm is given Function code Function Name Setting scope P6 1 01 Output Default Phase Protection 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed This function code is used to set whether the frequency inverter protects the output default phase When at P6 1 01 0 the frequency inverter can t provide protection
168. e 8 Attribution P3 0 44 Phase 9 Attribution P3 0 45 Phase 10 Attribution P3 0 46 Phase 11 Attribution P3 0 47 Phase 12 Attribution P3 0 48 Phase 13 Attribution P3 0 49 Phase 14 Attribution P3 0 50 Phase 15 Attribution Operation Result 4 0 1 Keyboard Potentiometer 2 Keyboard Frequency Reference 3 VFI Input 4 VF2 Input 5 PULS Reference DI6 6 7 8 9 PID Reference Operation Result 1 Operation Result 2 Operation Result 3 The ones of the phase property determine the acceleration and deceleration time of Simple PLC running at each phase and the tens of phase property determine the frequency source of Simple PLC Running or Multiplex Directive at each phase Function Code Function name Setting Scope P3 0 51 Simple PLC Running Time Unit 0 Second 1 Hour Function code Function Name Setting scope Timing Function Selection P3 1 00 0 Invalid 1 Valid 0 Digital Reference P3 1 02 Fixed Running Time 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference Selection 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference Analog input range corresponds to P3 1 02 Fixed Running Time 0000 0min 6500 0min The above function codes are used to complete the timing run function of the frequency inverter Refer to 7 1 8 for more details Timing Function Page 124 Function code Function name Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope
169. e example above in case of setting P3 2 03 Control Word B of Corresponding M2 01022 we can learn from referring to the explanation of Function Code P3 2 03 that M2 DI2 amp amp DI3 as shown in the figure below 01 02 2 Input 2 is DIZ i i Input 1 is DI3 Input 1 and Input 2 AND Equivalent as shown in the figure below DI2 DIB M2 In combination with the example above in case of setting the tens and ones of P3 2 08 Control Word C of Corresponding M2 at 01 input terminal function of corresponding digital it indicates that the function of M2 is forward running If 51 Synchronous Intermediate Relay M2 is set among P2 0 28 P2 0 32 at the same time corresponding multi functional output terminal outputs the signal X X X Ol A FWD Run Corresponding Digital Input Terminal Function The Intermediate Relay can not only respectively preset the delay time for its connection and disconnection through Function Code P3 2 12 P3 2 16 and P3 2 17 P3 2 21 but preset whether the reverse operation is conducted for output signals through Function Code P3 2 22 In combination with the example above in case of setting P3 2 13 delay time of corresponding M2 connection 10 0s and P3 2 18 delay time of corresponding M2 disconnection 5 0s when DI2 and DI3 are connected M2 is not immediately connected but connected after waiting for 10 0s Similarly when one of DI2 or DI3 is disconnected M2 is not immediately discon
170. e reference Multiplex Directive communication arithmetic results etc Acceleration and Deceleration Time Four groups of straight lines select the terminal to switch through acceleration and deceleration time S Curve 1 and S Curve 2 Emergency stop Interrupt output of frequency inverter Multiplex Speed 16 speed is allowable to set at most and use various combination of multiplex directive terminal to switch Simple PLC Function Continuously run 16 phase speed and independently set acceleration and deceleration time and running time Jogging Control Independently set Jogging frequency and jogging acceleration and deceleration time additionally set the unit under running state and confirm whether the jogging is preferential Rotating Speed Tracking Frequency inverter starts operation by tracking the load speed Fixed length and Fixed distance Control Realize fixed length and fixed distance control function through Impulse Input Counting Control Realize counting function through Impulse Input Wobbulating Function Apply for textile winding equipment Built in PID Realize process control closed loop system Page 5 Chapter 2 Product Information Item Specification AVR Function When the gird voltage fluctuates ensure constant output DC Braking Realize fast and stable shut down Slip Compensation Compensate the spee
171. e set by P3 1 08 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is Length Arrival 10 In the process of fixed length control the reset operation to actual length can be realized through digital input terminal Corresponding digital input terminal function is Length Reset 31 Actual length can be viewed through Function Code P3 1 09 or P9 0 13 Actual Length P3 1 08 Length Arrival Multi functional Output Terminal Output Pe Sal ea ances P2 0 28 2 0 32 10 otal Length Impulses Impulses per J gt Set Length Meter P3 1 10 P90 13 A Length Reset Length Reset g gt pr 0 00 P2 0 09 31 Length Impulse k J Input l Length Arrival Length Reset Input A Page 167 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 10 Counting Function Function Code Function name Setting Scope Factory Value P3 1 11 Reference Count Value 00001 65535 01000 P3 1 12 Designated Count Value 00001 65535 01000 The counting function of E Series Frequency inverter has two level signal output that is reference counting value arrival and designated counting value arrival In the application corresponding digital input terminal function is required t
172. e too large value can generate the system oscillation the smaller the value of KPI is the more stable the system is and the slower the response is Proportional Gains KPI The greater the value of Integral Time Til is the slower the response is and the more stable the output is the worse the fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is the smaller the value of TI is the faster the response is and the greater the output fluctuation is the too small value can generate the oscillation Integral Time TII The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain can be Derivative Time TD1 obtained at low frequency and a constant derivative gain can be obtained at high frequency The longer the derivative time is the greater the adjusting strength is Constant voltage Control Sleep Function For the feedback value and VF1 Voltage Signal have constituted a certain linear relationship PID feedback value is 100 and corresponding voltage valve is 10V the sleep function can be realized through the collection of the size of the voltage signal of VF1 When the voltage of VF1 is larger than upper limit of VF1 Input that is corresponding voltage value of sleep threshold the frequency inverter stops automatically after lasting for some time When the voltage of VF1 is less than lower limit of VFI Input that is corresponding voltage value of awak
173. ed Torque of the Motor Output Power 0 2 Times of Rated Power Output Voltage 0 2 Times of Rated Voltage of the Frequency inverter PULSE Impulse Input 0 01kHz 100 00kHz VFI Voltage OV 10V or 0 4mA 20mA VF2 Voltage OV 10V or 0 4mA 20mA Keyboard Potentiometer Voltage OV 10V Actual Length Value 0 Reference Length Value Set value of Function Code P3 1 08 Actual Counting Value 0 Designated Count Value Set value of Function Code P3 1 12 Communication Reference Refer to the Description of Chapter VII Motor Speed 0 Corresponding Speed of Max Output Frequency Output Current 0 0A 1000 0A Bus Voltage 0 0V 1000 0V Output Torque 2 Times of Rated Torque of the Motor 2 Times of Rated Torque of the Motor Operation Result 1 1000 1000 Operation Result 2 0 1000 Operation Result 3 1000 1000 Operation Result 4 0 1000 Page 111 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope P2 0 36 Analog FM1 Output Offset 100 0 100 0 P2 0 37 Analog FM1 Output Gains 10 00 10 00 P2 0 38 Analog FM2 Output Offset 100 0 100 0 P2 0 39 Analog FM2 Output Gains 10 00 10 00 The above function codes are generally used for correcting zero drift of analog output and deviation of output amplitude but also can be used to customize the required analog output
174. ed to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the greater filtering time makes the response speed of the analog detection become slow Acceleration Time Machine type Deceleration Time Page 188 Machine type Function code Function name Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Description Attribution P2 1 04 Min Input of Curve 3 P2105 Corresponding reference for Min Input of Curve 3 P2 1 06 Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 Input P2 1 07 Corresponding reference for Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 Input Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input Corresponding reference for Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input 060 0 Max Input of Curve 3 10 00V Corresponding reference for Max Input of Curve 3 100 0 Min Input of Curve 4 00 00V Corresponding reference for Min Input of Curve 4 000 0 Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input 03 00V Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input 030 0 Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input 060 0 Max Input of Curve 4 10 00V Corresponding reference for Max Input of Curve 4 100 0 Corresponding Reference 4 VF Input P2 1 08 2 1 10 P2 1 04 P2 1 06 Relation Curve between VF Input and Corresponding Reference The Corresponding Reference is the percenta
175. ee wee cee ETT cee cee wae wee wee oes oes ee nee eee 158 7 1 Common Function sstsssrerrseseeeeeeeesesesesesseenesseseseseesessssesesesseenesssseseseesesee eee 5R 7 1 1 Start and Stop Control 7 1 2 Start and Stop Mode ttsssessesesesssseseecesssnssessoeessenesossesessseseeseesessneseeeeeee 60 TAS Acceleration and Deceleration Moder ss ct tre etre tte tee settee tence cee cee ceecesseeees 163 7 1 4 Jogging Function tsstrsteseeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeceeseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseneeeseeeeeeens 163 7 1 5 Running Frequency Controls ssssessseesseesseeeeceseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeenenees 163 7 1 6 Multi speed Functions ssssesessseeensseecee see cee nee ces tee seseee ses eaeseeeeeee ee ret 165 7 1 7 Simple PLC GAS Timing FUNCtionss tee ce estes t teeter tee cee eee cence enn ncee cee cee eee cee cee eee nas eee cannes nen aee 166 7 1 9 Fixed length Functions 1evreseeetsteseeseee cee eerste tesennee cee eee eee ensen ee ceeeenees 167 7 1 10 Counting Functions strerecetetetereeciee cee etteesnne cee eeetentnnseceeeeeennee ee erene 168 7 1 11 Distance Control Functions 909 esesenseseesseseseseeesseaenseseeesonssneceseenee 169 7 1 12 Simple Internal Relay Programmable Functionss errssrrsrrere testes eee eseeeeees 170 7 1 13 Internal Timer Functionsssss cesses cssserncnrsrecoseeacsesnsceesacasneresoennses soeeee 173 7 1 14 Internal Operation Module Function 7 1 15 PID FUNCTION Cee 176 7 1 16 Wobbulating
176. ency 1 Arrival Output 27 Frequency 2 Arrival Output 28 Current 1 Arrival Output 29 Current 2 Arrival Output 30 Timing Arrival Output 31 VF1 Input Overlimit 32 In Off load 33 In Reverse Running 34 Zero current State 35 Module Temperature Arrival 36 Output Current Overlimit 37 Lower Frequency Arrival also output when shut down 38 Alarm Output 39 PLC Phase Completed 40 Current Running Time Arrival 41 Fault Output Not Output for Undervoltage 42 Timer 1 Timing Arrival 43 Timer 2 Timing Arrival 44 Timer 1 Timing Arrival but Timer 2 Timing Not Arrival 45 User Function 1 46 User Function 2 47 User Function 3 48 User Function 4 49 User Function 5 50 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M1 51 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M2 52 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M3 53 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M4 54 Synchronization Intermediate Relay M5 55 Distance over Zero 56 Distance Set value 1 Arrival 57 Distance Set value 2 Arrival 58 Operation Result 2 greater than 2 59 Operation Result 4 greater than 2 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function Function n Setting scope ends unction name ig scopi 0 Running Frequency 1 Reference frequency 2 Output Current Analog Output FM1 3 Output Torque Absolute Value Reference of Torque 4 Output Power 5 Output Voltage 6 Impulse Input 7 VF1 Voltage 8 VF1 Voltage Analog Ou
177. er Identification Control 11 Synchronous machine on load identification Invalid E100 12 Synchronous machine non load identification Invalid E100 CDI E100 Series only supports Static Identification and Complete Identification but not Load Synchronous Machine Identification and Non load Synchronous Machine Identification While E180 Series supports all modes 0 No Action When the frequency inverter is under normal operating state the parameter identification is not required to be done Page 182 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 1 Static Identification When the load cannot completely separate from the asynchronous motor this mode can be adopted Before conducting the identification the parameter value of PO 0 13 P0 0 18 must be set correctly After completing the setting and pressing Key RUN the frequency inverter operates the static identification the completion of the identification only can acquire three parameter values of PO 0 19 PO0 0 21 2 Complete Identification When the load completely separates from the asynchronous motor this mode can be adopted if the conditions allow please try to adopt this mode for it has better effect Before conducting the identification the parameter value of P0 0 13 P0 0 18 must be set correctly After completing the setting and pressing Key RUN the frequency inverter operates the complete identification the completion of the identification onl
178. es P4 0 16 PID Initial Value P4 0 17 PID Initial Value Hold Time P4 0 18 PID Feedback Loss Detection P4 0 19 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time P4 0 20 PID Stop Operation Page 197 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 2 5 Double Pumps Switching Function Circuit Breaker L1 T OR UC Power AC 3PH l Supply 380V L2 lt 1 S v oT W p CDO E BL Series Motor fe ee ee 1 mO TIA l Terminal Start lt IO DIt Multi functional Output Relay 1 l lt TIB Two Contactors of Controlling I l Switch on Motor OSE AN 4 COM e oO TIC m O Ta Multi functional Output Relay 2 O T2B The default is fault indication Reference parameters P2 0 30 e O T2C Description for Double Pumps Switching Function Parameter Function code Function name Setting value Description 0 Start Key Run on Control Panel Option for Runnin PO 0 03 Cuol Mode E 1 Start the External Terminal Dil P2 0 00 01 Option of A PO 0 04 Frequency Source Call the simple PLC program End of Single Running and Stop A End of Single Running and Save Simple PLC Final Value Running Mode Continuous Running Cycle N Times Switching times of double pump cycle when at P3 0 00 3 Option of PLC Memory for shutdown and Power off Memory power off M3 and M2 are determined by Control B M1 is controlled by Control Word C Cycle T
179. es the output frequency along the increase of the load so as to realize even load of more than one motor The set value of this function code is the frequency value declined at rated load Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Speed Torque Control Mode 0 Speed Control Selection 1 Torque Control PL 113 0 This function code is used to set what kind of running mode of the frequency inverter is adopted speed control mode or torque control mode When at P1 1 13 0 the speed control mode is adopted When at P1 1 13 1 the torque control mode is adopted Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Digital Reference P1 1 15 External Terminal VF1 Reference External Terminal VF2 Reference Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference MIN VF1 VF2 MAX VF1 VF2 Operation Result 1 Torque Reference Source CREIANARYNSS Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 12 Standby Torque Source 1 13 Standby Torque Source 2 Page 97 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 0 Digital Reference P1 1 15 The upper limit of the vector control torque is given by the value at based on Function Code P1 1 15 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference The torque Reference is given by the analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input ter
180. eservation Reservation Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Explanation for Setting Coefficient Property of Operation Corresponding setting value Function Description 0 Conduct setting at no decimal fraction to system by multiplication algorithm Non setting Operation Resul Coefficient of Operation tX Setting Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with one decimal Non setting Operation Result X Setting Coefficient of Operation 10 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with two decimals Non setting Operation Result X Setting Coefficient of Operation 100 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with three decimals Non setting Operation Result X Setting Coefficient of Operation 1000 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with four decimals Non setting Operation Result X Setting Coefficient of Operation 10000 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division without decimal Non setting Operation Resu Coefficient of Operation t Setting Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with one decimal Non setting Operation Result Setting Coefficient of Operation X 10 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with two decimals Non setting Operation Result Setting Coefficient of Operation X 100 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with three decimals Non setting Operation Result S
181. et four Multiplex Directive Terminals Terminal Function 9 12 refer to the Description for Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details 7 Simple PLC Reference The reference frequency is given by Simple PLCF unction the running frequency of the frequency inverter can be switched among 1 16 arbitrary frequency directives the sources hold time and acceleration amp deceleration time of each frequency directive can be set through Function Code 3 0 03 P3 0 50 8 PID Control Reference The reference frequency is given by the frequency calculated from PID Control When setting the frequency calculated from PID Control it is required to setting related parameters of PID Control Group P4 0 00 P4 0 20 9 Communication Reference The reference frequency is given by the principal computer through communication mode Refer to Chapter VIII for more details 10 Operation Result 1 11 Operation Result 2 12 Operation Result 3 13 Operation Result 4 The reference frequency is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation module Refer to the Description of Function Code P3 2 26 P3 2 39 for more details of the operation module The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9 0 46 P9 0 49 Function code Function Name Setting scope Keyboard F PO 0 05 agate ne 000 00 maximum frequency Reference When the Function Code P0 0 04 or P0 1 01 is set to 0
182. etting Coefficient of Operation X 1000 Operate the Setting Coefficient by division with four decimals Control Explanation for Operation Results Operation Results oriented Non setting Operation Result Setting Coefficient of Operation X 10000 Scope of Operation Results Operation Results Oriented Reference Frequency Highest Frequency Highest Frequency Remove Decimal Point Operation Results Oriented Reference Upper Frequency 0 Highest Frequency Remove Decimal Point Operation Results Oriented PID Reference 1000 1000 means 100 0 100 0 Operation Results Oriented PID Feedback 1000 1000 means 100 0 100 0 Operation Results Oriented Torque Reference 1000 1000 means 100 0 100 0 Operation Results Oriented Analog Output Operation Result 1 1000 1000 Operation Result 2 0 1000 Operation Result 3 1000 1000 Operation Result 4 0 1000 The operation result 1 can be reviewed through Function Code P9 0 46 The operation result 2 can be reviewed through Function Code P9 0 47 The operation result 3 can be reviewed through Function Code P9 0 48 The operation result 4 can be reviewed through Function Code P9 0 49 Page 175 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case e g the sum of VF1 Reference and VF2 Reference can be used to torque reference through operation When the scope of torque reference is 0 0 100 0 the
183. etting scope Ones Timing Control of Timer Tens Timing Control 2 of Timer 0 Timer Running 1 Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 1 2 Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 1 3 Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 2 Internal Timer 4 Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 2 Control Word Hundreds Timer 1 Reset Control Thousands Timer 2 Reset Control 0 Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 1 1 Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 2 Ten Thousands Timing Unit 0 Second 1 Minute The ones and tens of this function code is used to set the timing control of Timer 1 and Timer 2 respectively 0 Indicate that the timer is uncontrollable and continuously counting 1 Conduct control by Timer Input Terminal 1 when this terminal state is valid the timer starts counting when the terminal state is invalid the timer stops counting and keeps current value 2 Conduct inverse control by Timer Input Terminal 1 when this terminal state is invalid the timer starts counting when the terminal state is valid the timer stops counting and keeps current value 3 4 Refer to Description for 1 and 2 The hundreds and thousands of this function code are respectively used to set reset control of Timer and Timer 2 0 Control by Timer Reset Terminal 1 when this terminal state is valid the timing value of the timer is reset to zero 1 Control by Timer Reset Terminal 2 when this terminal state is valid the timing value of t
184. evel 010 0 P6 1 20 Off load Detection Time The Function Code P6 1 18 is sued to set whether the off load protection function is valid 0 and 1 respectively indicates invalid and valid If the off load protection function is valid and the fault handling mode is continuous run or stop by speed reduction when the output current of the frequency inverter is less than corresponding current value of off load detection level of P6 1 19 and the duration is over off load detection level of P6 1 20 the output frequency of the frequency inverter automatically reduces to 7 of rated frequency the frequency inverter gives an alarm of A19 in running or decelerating state in shutdown state the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Err19 if the load is recovered the frequency inverter is automatically recovered to run at reference frequency Setting scope 0 0 50 0 maximum frequency 20 0 0 0s 60 0s 01 0 Function code Function Name Factory Value P6 1 21 P6 1 22 Overspeed Detection Overspeed Detection Time This function is only valid when the frequency inverter runs with speed sensor vector control When the frequency inverter detects out actual speed of the motor over reference frequency and the exceeding value is greater than corresponding speed of speed detection value P6 1 21 and the duration is over speed detection value P6 1 22 the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err29 and the handling to fault
185. f Awaking Limit Threshold VFI Input Upper corresponding Voltage value of Sleep Limit Threshold The parameters for optimal performance of constant pressure water supply are shown in the table below they don t need to be set in normal conditions If the setting is required please refer to the explanation for setting of the function codes Function code Setting value Function code Attribution Function code P4 0 08 PID Deviation Limit 000 0 P4 0 09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00 00 P4 0 10 Proportional Gains KP2 020 0 P4 0 11 Integral Time TI2 02 00 P4 0 12 Derivative Time TD2 00 000 P4 0 13 PID Switch Conditions 0 ee P4 0 14 PID Switch Deviation 1 020 0 for Setting of P4 0 15 PID Switch Deviation 2 080 0 nae P4 0 16 PID Initial Value 000 0 P4 0 17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000 00 P4 0 18 PID Feedback Loss Detection 000 0 P4 0 19 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time 00 0 P4 0 20 PID Stop Operation 0 Page 186 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 2 2 Application for Injection Molding Machine Energy saving Transformation DC Reactor Circuit Breaker Brake UNIT Standard onfiguration of 15 AC 3PH L1 T _ R below U I 380v L2 4o S v Motor i Ww Power Supply L3 _ YT CDI E Series o __ FWD Run p ot L Upper Frequency 1 a Di2 mO Ta i functiona a Upper Frequency 2 wr ise Multi functional
186. from load increase so as to make the speed able to basically keep stable Function code Function Name Setting scope Velocity Loop Proportional 001 100 Gain 1 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 1 P1 0 06 Switching Frequency 1 000 00Hz P1 0 09 Velocity Loop Proportional 001 100 Gain 2 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 2 P1 0 09 Switching Frequency 2 P1 0 06 Highest Frequency The above parameters can realize that the frequency inverter may select the parameters of different Velocity Loop PI at different running frequency When the running frequency is less than the switch frequency 1 P1 0 06 the parameters of Velocity Loop PI are adjusted to P1 0 04 and P1 0 05 When the running frequency is greater that the switch frequency 2 P1 0 09 the parameters of Velocity Loop are P1 0 07 and P1 0 08 The parameters of Velocity Loop PI between switch frequency 1 and switch frequency 2 are the linear switch of two groups of PI parameters P1 0 04 P1 0 05 00 01 10 00 P1 0 07 P1 0 08 00 01 10 00 PI Parameter Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 1 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 1 Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 2 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 2 l Switching Frequency 1 Switching Frequency 2 The increase of proportional gain P can speed up the dynamic response of the system but if P is too great it may easily vibrate The decrease of integration time I can speed up the dynamic response of the
187. g FWD Reverse Running REV Control FWD and REV of the frequency inverter through these two terminals 3 line Running Control Confirm that the running mode of the frequency inverter is three line control mode through this terminal Refer to the Description for Terminal Control in 7 1 1 Forward Jogging Reverse Jogging Control FWD Jogging and REV Jogging through of the frequency inverter through these two terminals and be valid for any running control mode The running frequency and acceleration amp deceleration time of the inching refer to the description for0 1 08 P0 1 09 and P0 1 10 Terminal UP Terminal DOWN When the reference frequency is given by the keyboard increase or decreases the reference frequency through these two terminals Free Stop When the terminal state is valid the frequency inverter is blocked to output the shut down of the motor is not subject to the control of thet frequency inverter at this moment This mode has same meaning of free stop described in P1 0 16 Multiplex Directive Terminal 1 Multiplex Directive Terminal 2 Multiplex Directive Terminal 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal 4 Realize the references of 16 kinds of the directive through 16 kinds of states of these four terminals Fault Reset RESET Realize remote fault reset through this terminal and have same function with RESET Key on Keyboard Running Pause When this ter
188. g multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse running of the motor in which Terminal DIn is used as enable terminal DIx is used as running terminal and Dly is used as terminal of confirming the running direction Din and Dix are the active level and Dly is the active PLS When the running is needed the Terminal DIn must be closed at first and then the PLS of DIx is used to realize the running of the motor and the state of Dly is used to determine the running direction When the shutdown is needed it needs to be realized through disconnecting the signal of Terminal Din The terminal function references are as below Terminal Reference Value Description DIx Forward Running FWD Dly Reverse Running REV DIn 3 line Running Control SBI DIx Running K Direction K DI YE Seri REV eries SB3 Frequency 1 FWD DIn_ inverter COM SBI is the button of normally opened forward running SB3 is the button of normally closed stop and K is the button of running direction option 3 Communication Control Set P0 0 03 2 The start stop FWD and REV of the frequency inverter is realized by the upper computer through Communication Mode RS 485 E Series Frequency inverter supports Standard MODBUS Protocol refer to Chapter VIN Communication RS 485 for more details 7 1 2 Start and Stop Mode 1 Start Mode E Series Frequency inverter has three kinds of start modes
189. g speed Page 33 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 2 CDI E180 Series 0 75 7 5kW LED Keyboard Running State and Unit Display 1 Switch display mode 2 Cancel data modification 1 Function Code Option 2 Data Setting 3 When presetting the keyboard frequency set the frequency 1 Monitoring mode and scroll display of the data 2 When selecting and setting the parameters move the position of the data modification Installation Dimension of Operation Keyboard 59mm WWGZ Www 6 i 55mm Page 34 1 Display the setting value of every function code 2 Output monitoring value Potentiometer adjusts the frequency When use the parameters to set the mode read and store the setting parameters un Key ultifunction Key Stop Fault Reset Key Function of Indicator Description of Function When rotating in the forward direction the indicator lights up but when rotating in the backward direction the indicator doesn t work The frequency inverter lights up under running state Indicate voltage value Indicate current value Indicate frequency Indicate percentage Indicate rotating speed Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 3 CDI E180 Series11 75kW LED Keyboard e e FWD TUNE RUN Running State and Unit Display 1 Display the setting value of every function code 2 Output
190. ge Check whether external 24V power supply is short circuit Reduce the load of external 24V power supply Buffer Resistance The bus voltage fluctuates strongly Check whether the contactor is normal Check the fluctuations of incoming voltage Page 211 Chapter 9 Fault Handling 9 2 Motor Fault and Exclusion Measure If any of the faults below occurs to your motor find out the causes and take corresponding corrective measures If the fault persists please contact your DELIX distributor immediately Motor Fault and Its Elimination Tips for checking Corrective measures The motor does not rotate Has the power voltage been delivered to the terminals R S and T Switch on the power supply switch it off and on again check power voltage make sure the terminal bots have been tightened Measure the voltages of terminals U V and W with a rectifier type voltmeter Are they right Cut off power supply and switch it on again Has the motor been locked due to overload Reduce load and lift the lock Is there any fault information displayed on the monitor of the operator Check the fault according to the table of faults Has the instruction for forward or reverse rotation been fed in Check the wiring Has the frequency setting signal been fed in Change the wiring check the frequency setting voltage Has the running mode been set up correc
191. ge relative to the highest frequency Intermediate Delay Relay Control 00002 M1 is determined by Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Control 3714 Lower Frequency Arrival Signal is sued to realize suspension of stop Fault Auto Reset Number 00 No automatic fault reset Waiting Interval Time of Fault Auto Reset After the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault refer to the waiting time to automatic fault reset Page 189 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 2 3PID Constant Speed and Fixed length Control Function P Suppl Circuit Breaker aa TAn 380V 2 _T O 5s VO 139 tT CDO E w Se Series ee aoe heh TA Multi functional Output Relay 1 De Oe TB The default is the running signal r Reference parameters P2 0 29 PID P24 Tic l l l Feedback Die i l com TA Multi functional Output Relay 2 eae ee J T The default is fault indication i Reference parameters P2 0 30 l Length Reset ength Rese 5 oie COM Rotating Speedn PULS Max Input X 60 X PID Reference Impulses of Encoder If the diameter of detected pressurizing roller is Dmm it is line speed 3 14 D n Line Speedv 1 XD PULS Max Input X 60 X PID Reference Impulses of Encoder X PID Reference Feedback Range K X PID Reference If K 1000 PID Reference value is the line speed with unit m m If K 100 PID Reference value is the line speed with un
192. gging Function are valid under any running control mode but the forward and reverse switch function is only valid under keyboard control mode i e P0 0 03 0 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Only valid in keyboard operation mode 1 Valid for any mode Keyboard STOP Key Stop P5 0 01 Function This function code is used to set shutdown function of Key Stop When at P5 0 01 0 the shutdown function is only valid under Keyboard Control Mode i e P0 0 03 0 When at P5 0 01 1 the shutdown function is valid under any running control modes N the fault reset function is always valid Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P5 0 02 LED Running Display Parameter 1 H 0001 H FFFF H 001F P5 0 03 LED Running Display Parameter 2 H 0000 H FFFF H 0000 Automatic Time Switch of LED Runnin 00 0 No Switch P5 0 04 al ale 000 0 Display Parameter 000 1s 100 0s Function Code P5 0 02 and P5 0 03 determine the contents displayed by LED when the frequency inverter is at running state Function Code P5 0 04 determines the length of time that displays Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 When setting this to 0 only shown the display parameter given by PS 0 02 or it is to switch between display parameter set by P5 0 02 and display parameter set by P5 0 03 based on the reference time Page 140 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters The format for specific display contents
193. hapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Name of Terminal Description of Function Analog Output Signal FM1 GND Analog Output Terminal 1 FM2 GND Analog Output Terminal 2 Output 0 10V voltage or 4 20mA current Multi functional Open Collector Output and Common Terminal for Impulse Output When P2 1 20 1 his terminal is used as multi functional collector output YO Drive Capability DC48V 50mA below When P2 1 20 0 this terminal is used as Impulse Output FMP Impulse frequency 0 01kHz 100 00kHz 24V Power 24V Power Output Provide DC 24V supply voltage externally and generally adopt it digital input terminal or as working power for external low voltage equipments Drive Capability Max Output Current 300mA Communication Terminal Positive Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication Negative Signal Terminal of RS485 Communication 3 4 3 Wiring Instruction for Control Circuit CDI E100 Series directly has two terminals on control panel CDI E180 Series is not equipped with two terminals on control panel but on expansion card of communication To avoid interfere please distribute control loop apart from main loop and heavy current loop relay contact 220V program loop the Shielded Twisted Cable or Shielded Twisted Pair should be used in wiring the control circuit the shielding sheath should be connected to terminal PE of the frequency inver
194. hase B Input 54 Distance Reset 55 Integral Computation Reset 56 User Function 1 57 User Function 2 58 User Function 3 59 User Function 4 Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope P2 0 10 DI Filtering time 0 000s 1 000s P2 0 11 External Terminal Running Control Mode 0 Two line Type 1 1 Two line Type 2 2 Three line Type 1 3 Three line Type 2 P2 0 12 UP DOWN Terminal Change Rate 00 001Hz s 65 535Hz s P2 0 13 Minimum Input of Curve 1 00 00V P2 0 15 P2 0 14 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of Curve 1 100 0 100 0 P2 0 15 Maximum Input of Curve 1 P2 0 13 10 00V P2 0 16 Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of Curve 1 100 0 100 0 P2 0 17 VFI Filtering time 00 00s 10 00s P2 0 18 Minimum Input of Curve 2 00 00V P2 0 20 P2 0 19 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of Curve 2 100 0 100 0 P2 0 20 Maximum Input of Curve 2 P2 0 18 10 00V P2 0 21 Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of Curve 2 100 0 100 0 P2 0 22 VF2 Filtering time 0 00s 10 00s P2 0 23 Minimum Input of PULS 0 00kHz P2 0 25 P2 0 24 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of PULS 100 0 100 0 P2 0 25 Maximum Input of PULS P2 0 23 100 00kHz P2 0 26 Corresponding reference for
195. he timer is reset to zero The ten thousands of this function is used to set the timing unit O indicates and 1 indicates second and minute respectively Refer to the explanation of 7 1 13 Internal Timer Function Function code Function Name Setting scope P3 2 24 Timing Time of Timer 1 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 25 Timing Time of Timer 2 0 0s 3600 0s Function Code P3 2 24 and P3 2 25 are respectively used to set the time of Timer 1 and Timer 2 Page 129 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Operation Module Operation Module 0 No Operation Add Operation Subtraction Operation Multiply Operation Division Operation Greater than Judgment Equal to Judgment Equal to or Greater than Judgment Integration 9 F Reservation Ones Operation 1 Tens Operation 2 Hundreds Operation 3 Thousands Operation 4 The ones tens hundreds and thousands of this function code respectively correspond to one way operation Each for more details Function code operation can select Function Name Setting scope different operation methods Refer to the explanation of 7 1 14 Internal Operation Function Operation Setting Coefficient Property 0 Operate the Setting Coefficient multiplication without decimal 1 Conduct setting at one decimal fraction to system by multiplication algorithm 2 Conduct setting at two
196. he frequency inverter adopts LCD Keyboard at running state The value given by P5 0 06 P5 0 09 is the parameter address required to display e g if the reference value of Parameter P9 0 00 is needed to display in operation it is to set one reference value of P5 0 06 P5 0 09 to 9000 Page 142 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P5 0 10 LCD Line Display at stop 0000 9399 9001 P5 0 11 LCD Line 2 Display at stop 0000 9399 9000 P5 0 12 LCD Line 3 Display at stop 0000 9399 9004 P5 0 13 LCD Line 4 Display at stop 0000 9399 0000 The above function codes are used to set the contents displayed by each line when the frequency inverter adopts LCD Keyboard at shutdown state The value given by P5 0 10 P5 0 13 is the parameter address required to display e g if the reference value of Parameter P9 0 01 is needed to display when shut down it is to set one reference value of P5 0 10 P5 0 13 to 9001 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P5 0 14 LCD Chinese English Display Switch 0 Chinese 1 English 0 When the above function codes are used to set either Chinese Display or English Display when the frequency inverter adopts LCD Keyboard Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P5 0 15 Customized Display of Coefficient 0 0001 6 5000 1 0000 0 0 digit Decimal Point 1 1 digit Decimal Point 2 2 digit Decimal Point
197. he motor rotates reversely at low speed before starting this function shall be used when starting the motor by rotating it forward Output Frequency P1 0 10 2 Start after Brake Set Frequency s 5 Factory Value P1 0 14 000 P1 0 15 000 0s Start Frequency L _ Time 7 gt Running oe Hold Time Acceleration Command Brake of Start Time Time Frequency Page 161 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 2 Stop Mode E Series Frequency inverter has two kinds of shutdown modes Deceleration Stop and Free Stop Deceleration Stop Set P1 0 16 0 After the stop command is effective the frequency inverter reduces the output frequency according to the selected deceleration time and it stops when the output frequency is reduced to 0 When it is required to prevent the frequency inverter from sliding and jittering when it quickly stops or stops at low speed the stop DC brake function can be used after the frequency inverter is reduced to frequency given by P1 0 17 it is to wait for the time given by P1 0 18 and start DC brake at current given by P1 0 19 until the time given by P1 0 20 is reached and then the frequency inverter stops DC brake When it is required to quickly stop at high speed the dynamic braking shall be adopted The built in brake units of E Series Frequency inverter 15kW and below set the parameters of brake utilization rate P1 0 21 and externally connect brake resistan
198. ic Group Type of Frequency inverter 1 G Type constant torque load type 2 P Type fans and water pump load type Machine type Display Mode0 Basic Mode Prefix with P 1 User Mode Prefix with U 2 Verification Mode Prefix with Cc Control Mode0 V F Control 1 Open loop Vector Control SVC 2 Closed loop Vector Control Invalid E100 Option of operation control mode 0 Keyboard Control 1 Terminal Control 2 Communication Control Option of A Frequency Source 0 Keyboard Reference No Power off Memory 1 Keyboard Reference Power off Memory 2 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference 3 External Terminal VF1 Reference 4 External Terminal Vf2 Reference 5 PULS Reference DI6 6 Multiplex Directive Reference 7 Simple PLC Reference 8 PID Control Reference 9 Communication Reference 10 Operation Result 1 11 Operation Result 2 12 Operation Result 3 13 Operation Result 4 Keyboard Frequency Reference 000 00 maximum frequency Running Direction 0 Default Direction 1 Negation of Direction Maximum frequency 050 00Hz 320 00Hz Upper frequency Lower frequency highest frequency Lower frequency 000 00 Upper frequency Lower frequency operation mode 0 Running at lower limit frequency 1 Stop 2 Zero speed Running 0 Acceleration Time 0000 0 6500 0s Machine type Deceleration Time 0000 0 6500 0s Mach
199. imes N Intermediate Delay Relay Control Intermediate Delay M2 take M1 Signal Delayed Relay M2 Control Output Word B Intermediate Delay M3 take M2 Signal used for Relay M3 Control Word B signal inverse Page 198 Function code Function name Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Setting value Description Attribution P3 2 07 Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Control Word C 3914 M1I take completion signal in Simple PLC stage to realize shutdown function Pump Switching Time Point This setting value is larger than actual deceleration time of the frequency inverter Restart Time Point his setting value is larger than the setting value of P3 2 13 Pump 1 Run time Pump 1 Run time Pump 2 Run time Pump 2 Run time Pump Run Time Unit Second Hour Running Frequency of 10 digit Selection Pump 1 Running frequency of Pump 1 is determined by keyboard potentiometer Running Frequency of 10 digit Selection Pump 2 Running frequency of Pump 2 is determined by keyboard potentiometer Option for Relay T1 Function Define Synchronous M3 of Relay T1 Page 199 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication Chapter 8 E Series Frequency Inverter RS 485 Communication 1Explanation for E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication Terminal CDI E180 Series Frequency
200. imple Internal Relay Programmable Function Page 126 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Ones Control Logic Control Word B 0 Input 1 Intermediate Delay Relay M2 1 Input 1 and NOT Control Word B 2 Input 1 and Input 2 AND 7 3 Input 1 and Input 2 OR P3 2 04 Intermediate Delay Relay M3 4 Input 1 and Input 2 XOR Control Word B 5 the valid reference of Input 1 is Intermediate Delay Relay M4 valid the valid Reference of Input 2 is Control Word B invalid 6 Valid reference of Input 1 Rise Edge is valid Valid reference of Input 2 Rise Edge is invalid 7 Reverse valid signal of Input 1 Rising Edge 8 Input Rise Edge is valid and output a impulse signal with width of 200ms 9 Input 1 Rise Edge and Input 2 AND Hundreds and Tens Input 1 Selection 0 9 DI1 DI10 Intermediate Delay Relay M5 10 14 M1 M5 Control Word B 15 16 VF1 VF2 17 19 Standby 20 79 Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal Ten Thousands Input 2 Selection 0 9 DI1 DI10 10 14 M1 M5 15 16 VF1 VF2 17 19 Standby 20 59 Output Function 00 39 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal P3202 P3 2 03 P3 2 05 When which digit of Function Code P3 2 00 is 1 the relay of this digit is controlled by the above corresponding function code The ones of the above function codes are used
201. in solving the trouble and ensure the product is operated safely and reliably Content FOreWOrds sst ste csssesesseneensseeseeene ses eenees eee se esses ee eee ese eee sess eeen ees ene nesses see see eee ees eee see eee ees IV Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices re rresereeeeeeeeeteeeeeeesesssssssesseseaeeceeeeeeeeeeseeecerens 1 1 1 Examination and Acceptancests 1terrsee sre eeretecee setts cencee nee eneeencee cee tneeesees nee eneee 1 2 Precautions for safe operations 1 11 ssetreeeeetteteerteneeeceeeteeeeeencenceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeee eee Chapter 2 Product Information 2 1 Nameplate data and naming rule ee ee ee ee cee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeees 4 2 2 Technical SPECiICalloOns ss erseeretaeste tester ceed er seesaxenneessvesaniesans center neeennsnenehsesinwe 23 Product List Prete errr reer errr reece eee ee eee eee eee eer eee eee eee Tee Tre Tre reer re eee eee eee eee ee Teer ee ere ery 8 2 4 Appearance and installation size eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee Tee Tee Tee Teer rere 9 25 Routine maintenance eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eT eee ee Tee Tee Tee eee eee Tee eee eee reer rere 12 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 1 Option of the Site and Space for Installation Perret er rere reer eee ee eee ee eee er rer rer reer res 15 3 2 Wiring of the Peripherals and Optional parts seeeee eee
202. inal VF2 Reference PID Reference Value is set by the analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input terminal VF1 VF2 VF1 and VF2 can input OV 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve between the input value of VF1 and VF2 and PID value the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 The deviation between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 05 P8 1 12 4 PULS Reference DI6 PID Reference Value is set by high speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and PID value can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is linear relationship 5 Communication Reference PID Reference Value is set by the upper computer through communication mode refer to Chapter VIII for more details Page 133 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference PID Reference Value is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is
203. ine type Page 42 Type of Motor 0 Common Motor 1 Variable Frequency Motor 2 Synchronous Motor Valid E100 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value PO 0 14 Motor rated power 0000 1kW 1000 0kW Machine type gt PO 0 15 Motor rated frequency 000 01Hz Highest frequency 050 00 PO 0 16 Motor rated voltage 0001V 2000V Machine type PO 0 17 Motor rated current 000 01 655 35 Machine type PO 0 18 Motor Rated Rotating Speed 00001 65535 Machine type PO 0 19 Stator resistance 00 001 65 535 Machine type PO 0 20 Rotor resistance 00 001 65 535 Machine type PO 0 21 Motor leakage inductance 000 01 655 35 Machine type PO 0 22 Motor common inductance 0000 1 6553 5 Machine type PO 0 23 Non load current 000 01 Motor rated current Machine type e e e e OE Pt Parameter Identification Control 00 No action QL Static identification 02 Complete identification 11 Synchronous machine on load identification Invalid E100 12 Synchronous machine non load identification Invalid E100 Option of Frequency Source 1 Group Expansion Group Frequency Source A Frequency Source B Frequency Source A B Frequency Source A B Max Value ofA amp B Min Value ofA
204. ine responds the data package ADR CMD ADRESS DATA ADR CMD ADRESS DATA CRC Page 207 Chapter 9 Fault Handling Chapter 9 Fault Handling 9 1 Frequency inverter Fault and Exclusion Measure Fault display Description Details Fault elimination Err00 No Fault Over current at constant speed The output current exceeds the over current value while the frequency inverter is running at a constant speed Check whether the output circuit of the frequency inverter has short circuit Check whether the input voltage is relatively low Check whether the load has mutation Conduct parameter identification or improve low frequency torque compensation Check whether the rated power of the motor or frequency inverter is large enough Over current at acceleration When the frequency inverter accelerates output current exceeds overcurrent 2 2 times of rated current of the frequency inverter Check whether the motor is and its lines are short circuit grounded or too long Check whether the input voltage is relatively low Delay the acceleration time Conduct parameter identification or improve low frequency torque compensation or adjust V F Curve Check whether the load has mutation Check whether it is to select speed tracking or start after the motor stops stably Check whether the rated power of the mo
205. ing given value is the percentage relative to digital reference torque When the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding PID the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to PID Reference feedback range Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Expansion Card YO1 Function Selection Invalid E100 P2 0 29 T1 Relay Function Selection P2 0 28 00 P2 0 30 T2 Relay Function Selection Expansion Card YO2 Function Selection Invalid E100 YO Function Selection Use Terminal YO FMP as YO i e P2 1 20 1 P2 0 31 P2 0 32 The above five function codes are used to select the functions of five multi functional output terminals in which YO amp T1 Relay and T2 Relay are configured on control panel YO amp YO2 are on I O Expansion Card of CDI E180 Series but invalid for CDI E100 Series The Descriptions of multi functional output terminals are as below Setting value Function Description 0 No Function Multi functional output terminals have no any functions 1 Frequency inverter under When the frequency inverter is at running state have Running output frequency able to be zero and output Signal ON 2 Fault Stop Output Hine ae as breaks down and shuts 3 Frequency Level Testing Refer to the Description for Function Code P2 2 03 and FDT1 Output P2 2 04 Page 107 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting value Function
206. ing threshold the frequency inverter automatically starts and runs Note in shut down state if the voltage of VF1 is larger than upper limit of VF1 Input the frequency inverter cannot start running Corresponding Voltage Value of Sleep Threshold Sleep Threshold PID Value X 10V Corresponding Voltage Value of Awaking Threshold Awaking Threshold PID Value X 10V Page 185 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case The setting parameters of Constant voltage Control Sleep Function are as below Function code Setting Function code Attribution value Function name Intermediate Delay M3 and M2 are determined b y Control B P3 2 00 Relay M1 Control 00112 M1 is determined by Control Word C Word B Intermediate Delay P3 2 07 Relay M1 Control 2248 Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M2 Control M2 Reverse M1 Signal Word B Intermediate Delay Relay M2 Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M3 Control M3 take Arrival Signal of Timer 1 Word B Intermediate Delay Relay M3 Control Word B Internal Timer Control Word Ml take VF1 Input more than upper limit and use it for Input of Timer 1 Take M2 Signal and use it for Reset of Timer 1 Take M3 Signal and use it for Suspension of Frequency inverter Define Timer 1 Timing Time of Timer Continuous Delay Time of arriving at Upper Limit of VFI Input Sleep Threshold VFI Input Lower Corresponding Voltage value o
207. interference arising from the frequency inverter When the carrier frequency is lower the high order harmonic components of output current increase the losses of motor increase and the temperature of the motor rises When the carrier frequency is higher the losses of motor are reduced and the temperature rise of the motor decreases but the losses of the frequency inverter increase and the temperature of the frequency inverter rise so the interference is enhanced The regulation of the carrier frequency can influence the following performance Carrier Frequency Low High Noise of Motor Large gt Small Bad Good Output Current Waveform Temperature Rise of Motor High gt Low Temperature Rise of Frequency inverter Low gt High Current Leakage Small Large External Radiation Interference Function code Function name Small Large Setting scope Factory Value P1 0 23 Fan Control 0 Rotate at running 1 Continuous Running 2 Control based on Temperature Refer to action mode used for selecting the cooling fan When at P1 0 23 0 the fans of the frequency inverter run at running state and can t run at stop state When at P1 0 23 1 the fans keep running after power on When at P1 0 23 2 the fans run when the temperature of the radiator is higher than 35 C but can t run when lower than 35 C Page 92 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function
208. inverter hasn t had RS 485 Communication Terminal on control panel SG 485 Signal Positive SG 485 Signal Negative CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter hasn t had RS 485 Communication Terminal on control panel If the communication is required the external expansion card must be connected 2Explanation for E Series Frequency inverter Communication Parameter Before the use of RS 485 Communication must use the keyboard to set Baud Rate Data Format and Communication Address Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 P4 1 00 Baud Rate 3 9600 3 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 0 No Verification 8 N 2 1 Even Parity Verification 8 E 1 P4 1 01 Data Format 2 Odd Parity Verification 8 O 1 0 3 No Verification 8 N 1 A 000 Broadcast Address P4 1 02 Local Machine Address 001 249 1 P4 1 03 Response Delay 00 20ms 2 ee A 00 0 Invalid P4 1 04 Communication Timeout 00 15 60 05 0 0 ia 0 ASCII Mode Reservation P4 1 05 Data Transmission Format LRTU Mode 1 Response Delay when the frequency inverter receives the data and after the time set by Function Code P4 1 03 is delayed the frequency inverter starts recovering the data Communication Timeout the interval between data frames received by the frequency inverter is over the time set by Function Code P4 1 04 the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err14 it is deemed as abnormal communi
209. inverter is less than or equal to zero current detection level and the duration exceeds the delay time of zero current detection the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON once the running current resets to the current detection level larger than zero the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is zero current state 34 refer to the Description of the figure below Running current Zero current detection level Zero current detected signal Time Current Detection Delay Time when T at O Function code Function name Setting scope 00 0 No Detection 000 1 300 0 P2 2 13 Output Current Overlimit Value P2 2 14 Delay Time for Current Overlimit Detection 000 00s 600 00s When the running current of the frequency inverter is greater than the value set by Function Code P2 2 13 and the duration exceeds the value set by Function Code P2 2 14 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON once the running current resets to the value less than and equal to overlimit of output current the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is output current overlimit 36 refer to the Description of the figure below Page 119 Cha
210. inverter should not be connected reversely Otherwise it shall lead to frequency inverter explosion 4 Starting and stopping the motor directly by power on and power off the main circuit of the frequency inverter shall cause frequent jumping faults to the frequency inverter 5 When selecting frequency inverter type configure the frequency inverter as per actual load power load working current When there is heavy load type selection can be magnified by 1 to 2 shifts Smaller type shall cause overcurrent or overload jumping faults to the frequency inverter 6 Protection level of the frequency inverter is IP20 that is it can prevent a foreign matter with a diameter of 12 5mm or greater from completely entering without waterproof function 7 Frequency inverter if stored for more than half a year should be powered with a voltage regulator to increase voltage gradually Otherwise there is danger of electric shock and explosion 8 If line connecting the frequency inverter to the motor exceeds 50m it is required to add AC output inductor Otherwise the frequency inverter and the motor are in danger of damage In order that you can use the product safely for a long time you need to carefully inspect the product regularly power off it to clean and maintain For any trouble in process of inspection please notify us by phone or mail Our service hotline is 0571 85243785 We shall send profess ional to your site as per your trouble to assist you
211. ions 1 It is impossible to adjust parameter during operation of frequency inverter Refer to function sheet 2 Start parameter protection in P5 0 18 parameter write in protection Page 39 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 4 Function Code Display Mode E Series Frequency inverter provides three kinds of Function Code Display Modes Basic Mode User Mode and Verification Mode Basic Mode P0 0 01 0 In basic mode the function code has the prefix with P At this time the Function Code P5 0 17 determines what parameters of the function codes are specifically displayed Its ones tens hundreds and thousands respectively correspond to each function code group Refer to the following table for explanation of specific meaning Function Code Setting scope Explanation 0 Only display basic parameter group Ones g Display the menus at all levels Don t display Group P7 i Tens n Function parameter displays Display Group P7 the Option of P5 0 17 Don t display verification group Hundreds Display verification group Don t display code group Thousands Display code group User Mode P0 0 01 1 Only display customization parameters of user function and use Function Code of Group P7 0 to determine what parameters of the function codes are specifically displayed by the frequency inverter Refer to the description for Group P7 0 for more details In user m
212. ions of Running Command Selection Terminals Current Running Control Mode Running Control Mode Terminal Control Keyboard Control P0 0 03 0 Communication Control Communication Control Keyboard Control Terminal Control P0 0 03 1 Communication Control Keyboard Control Keyboard Control Communication Control P0 0 03 2 Terminal Control Keyboard Control Note when Terminal 1 and Terminal 2 are OFF it is the running control mode set by Function Code P0 0 03 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 10 DI Filtering time 0 000s 1 000s 0 010 This function code is used to set the software filtering time of terminal DI input state If the occasions which use Terminal DI Input are easily to lead to false operation by interference this parameter can be increased to enhance the anti interference ability but the increase of the filtering time may cause slow response of Terminal DI Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Two line Type 1 External Terminal 1 Two line Type 2 Running Control Mode 2 Three line Type 1 3 Three line Type 2 This function code defines that when the control running mode is terminal control i e P0 0 03 1 there are four different modes to control the running of the frequency inverter Refer to Terminal Control in 7 1 1 for more details Page 105 Chapter 6 Description of
213. ircuit or grounding of the output circuit is forbidden Refrain from directly touching the output circuit or bringing the output wire in contact with the chassis of the frequency inverter Otherwise electric shock or grounding fault might occur In addition always guard the output wire against short circuit 4 It is forbidden to connect phase lead capacitors or LC RC noise filters Do not connect phase lead capacitor or LC RC noise filters to the output circuit 5 Refrain from installing magnetic starter If a magnetic starter or electromagnetic contactor is connected to the output circuit the frequency inverter will trigger the operation of over current protection circuit because of the surge current resultant from the frequency inverter s connection to the load The magnetic contactor should not operate until the frequency inverter has stopped outputting 6 Installation of thermal overload relay The frequency inverter consists of an electronic overload protection mechanism Admittedly a thermal over load relay should be installed when an frequency inverter is used in driving several motors or when a multi pole motor is used In addition the rated current of the thermal over load relay should be the same as the current indicated on the nameplate of the motor 7 Setting of noise filter on the output side Mounting a special purpose noise filter on the output side of the frequency inverter can reduce radio noise and interfering noise Interfe
214. it dm m Calculation for Impulse per meter P Impulses of Encoder x1000 XD Page 190 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Description for Parameters of Fixed Length of PID Constant Line Speed Means that the users don t need to modify the parameters in general Means that the users can set the parameters based on actual conditions Function name Factory value Description Attribution Option for Running Control Mode 0 Start Key Run on Control Panel 1 Start the External Terminal DI1 P2 0 00 01 Frequency Source A 8 The frequency source is PID Reference Acceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions Deceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions PID Reference Source 0 The reference source is given from P4 0 01 PID Value Reference The reference value is given by the users based on actual needs PID Feedback Source The feedback source is given by PULS Reference DI6 PID Action Direction PID Direct Action The feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Reverse Action The smaller the feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Reference Feedback Range Calculate the setting based on formula Reference Length The users preset based on actual needs Impulse Count per meter Calculate the setting based on formula DI2 Terminal Function Defi
215. ith U 2 Verification Mode Prefix with C This function code is used for confirming what a kind of display modes is selected for inventor 0 Basic Mode Prefix with P The frequency inverter specifically displays what parameters of the function codes are determined by Function Code P5 0 17 Refer to the description for Function Code P5 0 17 for more details 1 User Mode Prefix with U Only display customization parameters of user function and use Function Code of Group P7 0 to determine what parameters of the function codes are specifically displayed by the frequency inverter Refer to the description for Group P7 0 for more details In user mode the function code has the prefix with U 2 Verification Mode Prefix with C Only display the modified parameters in case of any difference of function code between reference value and factory value it is deemed that the parameters are changed the function code has the prefix with C at this time Note no matter what the prefix is P or U or C the meaning of their relative parameters is the same and the prefix is only for distinguishing the display mode Page 72 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope 0 V F Control 1 Open loop Vector Control SVC Control Mode 2 Closed loop Vector Control Invalid E100 0 V FC control Be applicable for the occasions without high requirements to load or where one set of freq
216. ive Running Time of frequency inverter Oh 65000h Display accumulated electrifying P5 1 01 Accumulative Power On Time time of frequency inverter since Oh 65000h exworks Display accumulated power consumption of frequency inverter 0 65000 up to now Accumulative Power Consumption Display current temperature of the module Module Temperature 000 C 100 C Hardware Version No Hardware version number 180 00 Software Version No Software version number 001 00 Program Nonstandard Label Version numberot dedicated 0000 9999 program Page 145 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 7 Fault Display and Protection Control Group P6 P6 0 Fault Display Group Function code Function Name Setting scope P6 0 00 Fault Record 1 Last Time 0 40 P6 0 01 Fault Record 2 0 40 P6 0 02 Fault Record 3 0 40 The above function codes record the fault types in the last three times 0 indicates no fault Concerning possible cause of each fault code and solutions refer to related explanation of Chapter IX Function code Function name Description for Parameters P6 0 03 Fault Frequency 1 Frequency of the fault in the last time P6 0 04 Fault Current Current of the fault in the last time P6 0 05 Bus Voltage 1 when at Fault Bus voltage of the fault in the last time Input Terminal State 1 when at fault Input
217. l situations of the applications Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 10 Proportional Gains KP2 000 0 100 0 020 0 P4 0 11 Integral Time TI2 00 01s 10 00s 02 00 P4 0 12 Derivative Time Td2 00 000s 10 000s 00 000 The above function codes have the same functions with Function Code P4 0 05 P4 0 07 refer to the Description for P4 0 05 P4 0 07 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 No Switch P4 0 13 PID Switch Conditions 1 Switch through Terminals 2 Switch through Deviation In some occasions of special applications better PID Parameter is required to be adopted for control under different conditions This function code is used to set under what condition PID Parameter is required to be switched 0 No Switch Adopt PID parameters of P4 0 05 P4 0 07 by default 1 Switch through Terminal The switch is made through digital input terminal set this terminal function at 41 switch of PID parameter When the terminal signal is valid adopt PID parameters of P4 0 05 P4 0 07 When the terminal signal is valid adopt PID parameters of this group of P4 0 10 P4 0 12 2 Switch based on Deviation The switch is made based on setting value of Function Code P4 0 14 and P4 0 15 refer to the Description of Function Code P4 0 14 and P4 0 15 Page 137 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 14 PID Swi
218. le to connect the encoder through Terminal DIS amp DI6 on control panel such an encoder connection method can realize simple closed loop control through PID Control and used for occasions without high requirements to control accuracy The control panel is not equipped with encoder interface so external encoder expansion card is required It supports ABZ Incremental Encoder UVW Incremental Encoder and Rotary Transformer This encoder connection method can realize high performance closed loop vector control and be used for occasions with high requirements to control accuracy E100 Only be equipped with asynchronous motor E180 Not only be equipped with asynchronous motor but synchronous motor Running information Given frequency output current output voltage bus voltage input signal feedback value module temperature output frequency motor synchronous speed etc Through gt gt Key display 32 loops at most Error information Save the historical information of 3 faults under running state of fault protection Every piece of fault information includes frequency current bus voltage and input output terminal status when fault happens uo0no9 01g Frequency inverter protection Overcurrent overvoltage module fault protection undervoltage overload external fault protection EEPROM fault protection ground protection default phase etc Frequency inverter alarm Locked protection overlo
219. lectric shock or explosion might occur 11 Never confuse the input terminals Otherwise explosion or damage to the property might occur 12 For frequency inverter of which storage period exceeds half year please increase the input voltage gradually by using regulator to prevent from electric shock and explosion 13 Do not operate the frequency inverter with wet hand otherwise there is danger of electric shock 14 All parts should be replaced by professional only It is strictly prohibitive to remain stub or metal object in machine to prevent from fire 15 After replaced control board please perform relevant parameter setting before operation to prevent from damage of materials Attention Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices 1 If the motor is used for the first time or has been in leisure for a long time remember to check its insulation first It is advisable to use a 500V megger Make sure the insulation resistance should not be less than 5 MU 2 If you need to operate the frequency inverter at frequencies beyond 50Hz please consider the support capability of the mechanical devices 3 The output at certain frequencies might encounter the resonance points of load devices This can be avoided by resetting the jump frequency parameter of the frequency inverter 4 Do not use three phase frequency inverters as two phase ones Otherwise fault or damage might occur 5
220. log 01 59 Digital Input Terminal Function VF2 Terminal Function as Digital Input Page 52 00 Use as Normal Analog 01 59 Digital Input Terminal Function Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope P2 1 25 Valid State Option of VF 0 Active High Level 1 Active Low Level Ones VF1 Tens VF2 P2 1 26 DII Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 27 DI2 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 28 DI3 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 29 YO Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 30 T1 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s P2 1 31 T2 Delay 0 0s 3600 0s ad a ba lt a Dalal Group P2 2 Auxiliary Group P2 2 00 Accumulative Power on Arrival Time Reference 00000h 65000h P2 2 01 Accumulative Running Arrival Time Reference 00000h 65000h P2 2 02 Detected Reference frequency Width upon Arrival 000 0 100 0 P2 2 03 Frequency Detection FDT1 000 00Hz Highest Frequency P2 2 04 FDT1 Lagged Value 000 0 100 0 P2 2 05 Frequency Detection FDT2 000 00Hz Highest Frequency P2 2 06 FDT2 Lagged Value 000 0 100 0 Da DX Xa al a BX Xa P2 2 07 Detected Frequency Value 1 upon Arbitrary Arrival 000 00Hz Highest Frequency x P2 2 08 Detected Frequency 1 Width upon Arbitrary Arrival 000 0 100 0 Detected Frequency Value 2 upon Arbitrary Arrival 000 00Hz Highes
221. lt 2 11 Operation Result 3 12 Operation Result 4 Page 134 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 0 External Terminal VF1 Reference 1 External Terminal VF2 Reference PID Feedback Value is set by the analog input terminal 2 VFI VF2 PID Feedback Value is set by the analog VF1 VF2 input 3 VF1 VF2 PID Feedback Value is set by the analog F1 VF2 input 4 PULS Reference PID Reference Value is set by high speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal DI6 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and corresponding PID value can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is linear relationship 5 Communication Reference PID Reference Value is set by the upper computer through communication mode refer to Chapter VIII for more details 6 MAX VF1 VF2 PID Feedback Source is set by maximum value between Analog VF1 and VF2 Input 7 MIN VF1 VF2 PID Feedback Source is set by minimum value between Analog VFI and VF2 Input 8 Multiplex directive terminal switches among the above among the above conditions PID Reference Value switches among the above 8 kinds of conditions by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals when in use it is to take three terminal functions Terminal Function 9 11 refer to the table below for more details
222. me Setting scope Fony fication rence code Value limit page 0 ABZ Incremental Encoder 1 UVW Incremental Encoder Invalid E100 P0 1 26 Type of Encoder an Transformer Invalid 00 ak l 86 3 9 Reservation 10 Distance Control Open Collector P0 1 27 Line Number of Encoder 00001 65535 01024 Phase Sequence of 0 Forward Direction PO 1 28 Encoder 1 Reverse Direction 0 Encoder Disconnection 00 No action P0 1 29 Testing Time 00 1s 10 0s mts K Stator Resistance of Machine PO 1 30 Synchronous Machine 00 001 65 535 type Al Back EMF of Machine PO 1 31 Synchronous Machine 0000 0 6553 5 type A amp 87 0 Forward Direction Machine P0 1 32 UVW Phase Sequence 1 Reverse Direction type Alk P0 1 33 UVW Encoder Angle _ 000 0 359 9 il Alk Pole pairs of Rotary a Machine PO 1 34 Transformer 00001 65535 type Al 5 2 Group P1 Motor Control Parameter Function code Function name Setting scope Sort P1 0 Basic Group V F Curve Mode 0 Straight Line 1 Multi point Broken Line 2 Square V F Curve 1 3 Square V F Curve 2 4 Square V F Curve 3 Torque Boost 00 0 Automatic Torque Boost 00 1 30 0 Cutoff Frequency of Torque Boost 000 00Hz Highest Frequency V F Slip Compensation Gain 000 0 200 0 Velocity Loop Proportional 001 100 Gain 1 Circulation Velocity Integral Time 1 00 01 10 00 Switching Frequency 1 000 00Hz P1 0 09 Velocity Loop
223. minal VF1 VF2 VF1 and VF2 can input OV 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and the torque set value the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 The deviation between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8 1 05 P8 1 12 3 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference The torque reference is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal E Series Frequency inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals Terminal Function 9 12 refer to the Description for Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2 0 00 P2 0 09 for more details 4 PULS Reference DI6 The torque reference is given by high speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and torque upper limit value can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is line relationship 5 Communication Reference The torque reference is given by the upper computer through communication mode refer to Chapter VIII for more details
224. minal state is valid the terminal slows down and stops but all running parameter are memorized When this terminal state is invalid the frequency inverter is resets to running state before stop External Fault Input When this terminal state is valid the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Err13 and then the fault is handled based on fault protection action mode Acceleration amp Deceleration Time Selection Terminal 1 Acceleration amp Deceleration Time Selection Terminal 2 Realize the switch among four groups of straight acceleration and deceleration time refer to Appendix 3 for more details Frequency Source Selection Terminal 1 Frequency Source Selection Terminal 2 Frequency Source Selection Terminal 3 When at P0 1 00 8 the functions of these terminals are valid Realize the switch among 8 kinds of frequency sources through 8 kinds of state of these three terminals Running Command Selection Terminal 1 Running Command Selection Terminal 2 Realize the switch among running control modes through close open state of these two terminals Page 101 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting value Function Description 23 UP DOWN Reference Reset When the reference frequency is given by the keyboard this terminal can remove the frequency allowance adjusted by Terminal UP DOWN or KeyA amp amp on Keyboard to reset the reference frequency to
225. mined by Control C P3 2 04 M3 take Reverse signal output of M2 P3 2 08 M2 take signal in operation P3 2 00 P3 2 09 M3 signal used for length automatic reset Page 192 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case The parameters for optimal performance of constant line speed fixed length control are shown in the table below they don t need to be set in normal conditions If the setting is required please refer to the explanation for setting of the function codes Function code Function name Factory value Description Attribution P4 0 08 PID Deviation Limit 000 0 P4 0 09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00 00 P4 0 10 Proportional Gains KP2 020 0 P4 0 11 Integral Time TI2 02 00 P4 0 12 Derivative Time TD2 00 000 P4 0 13 PID Switch Conditions 0 P4 0 14 PID Switch Deviation 1 P4 0 15 PID Switch Deviation 2 P4 0 16 PID Initial Value P4 0 17 PID Initial Value HoldTime P4 0 18 PID Feedback Loss Detection P4 0 19 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time P4 0 20 PID Stop Operation Refer to Description for Setting of Function Codes Page 193 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 2 4PID Constant Speed and Fixed distance Control Function Circuit Breaker Power Supply ii a OR U AC 3PH 380V ie ro S V i3 _
226. monitoring value N f Potentiometer adjusts the frequency 1 Switch display mode 2 Cancel data modification when use the parameters to set the mode read and store the setting parameters Run Key 1 Function Code Option 2 Data Setting 3 When presetting the keyboard frequency set the frequency Multifunction Key Stop Fault Reset Key Monitoring mode and scroll display of the data When selecting and setting the parameters move the position of the data modification Installation Dimension of Operation Keyboard Function of Indicator 72mm Description of Function When rotating in the forward direction the indicator lights up but when rotating in the backward direction the indicator doesn t work When the parameter identification function operates the light flickers The light is normally on at torque control mode The frequency inverter lights up under running state FWD TUNE RUN V A Cao amp y 1 01 0 WW9E GEO wwz Indicate voltage value Indicate current value Indicate frequency Indicate percentage Indicate rotating speed 68mm Page 35 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 CDI E180 Series 0 75 7 5Kw LCD Keyboard Monitoring window displays four lines at most Multifunction Key 1 Switch display mode amp enter JOG 2 Cancel data modification 1 e
227. mory P3 0 03 Phase Directive 0 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 04 Phase O Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 X P3 0 05 Phase Directive 1 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 06 Phase 1 Running Time _ 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 x P3 0 07 Phase Directive 2 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 08 Phase 2 Running Time _ 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 x P3 0 09 Phase Directive 3 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 10 Phase 3 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 x P3 0 11 Phase Directive 4 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 12 Phase 4 Running Time _ 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 4 P3 0 13 Phase Directive 5 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 14 Phase 5 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 3k i23 P3 0 15 Phase Directive 6 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 16 Phase 6 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 X P3 0 17 Phase Directive 7 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 18 Phase 7 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 xk P3 0 19 Phase Directive 8 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 20 Phase 8 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 xX P3 0 21 Phase Directive 9 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 22 Phase 9 Running Time _ 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 3k P3 0 23 Phase Directive 10 100 0 100 0 000 0 x P3 0 24 Phase 10 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 X P3 0 25 Phase Directive 11 100 0 100 0 000 0 xk P3 0 26 Phase 11 Running Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 x Page 54 Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope P3 0 27 Phase
228. n 2 CDI E180 Series Model 1 H Model W Wi H Hi H2 D D1 ed CDI E180G0R75T4B CDI E180G1R5T4B 134 120 184 170 154 148 85 5 CDI E180G2R2T4B Main Circuit Wiring Diagram P PE R S T U V W PB Litree phase J Lihree phase_J input output Connect power Connect motor supply Earthing Brake Resistance Note 1 Model 1 adopts plastic shell 2 The ordering of the terminals is subject to material object Model 2 i gt HIHIH 4 Model w w1 H H1 H2 D Di d CDI E180G3R7 P5R5T4B CDI E180G5R5MT4B 159 145 299 215 199 160 95 5 Main Circuit Wiring Diagram 9 P N PE R S T U V W PB I ihree phase three phase Earthing Ynput output Connect power Connect motor supply Brake Resistance Note 1 Model 2 adopts plastic shell 2 The ordering of the terminals is subject to material object Model 3 Model W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 d CDI E180G5R5 P7R5T4B CDI E180G7R5 P011T4B 204 188 304 288 270 194 142 5 CDI E180G011MT4B
229. n Function code Function Name Setting scope Iti functional output terminal functions Refer to 7 1 12 for more details Simple P3 2 12 MI Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 13 M2 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 14 M3 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 15 M4 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 16 M5 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 17 MI Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 18 M2 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 19 M3 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 20 M4 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s P3 2 21 The above Intermediate Del Function code M5 Disconnection Delay Time function codes are used to set th ay Relays Function Name 0 0s 3600 0s Setting scope e delay time of connecting or disconnecting the Valid State Option of Intermediate Relay 0 Not Negation 1 Negation Ones M1 Tens M2 Hundreds M3 Thousands M4 Ten Thousands M5 This function code is used to set valid state of the Intermediate Delay Relay If which digit is 0 it means that the relay of this digit will output the signal of acq uired results If which digit is 1 it means that the relay of this digit will invert the signal of acquired results and output it Page 128 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name S
230. n 1 Negation Ones M1 Tens M2 Hundreds M3 Thousands M4 Ten Thousands M5 Page 57 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Internal Timer Control Word Ones Timing Control of Timer Tens Timing Control 2 of Timer 0 Timer Running 1 Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 1 2 Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 1 3 Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 2 4 Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 2 Hundreds Timer 1 Reset Control Thousands Timer 2 Reset Control 0 Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 1 1 Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 2 Ten Thousands Timing Unit 0 Second 1 Minute Timing Time of Timer 1 0 0s 3600 0s Timing Time of Timer 2 0 0s 3600 0s Operation Module 0 No Operation 1 Add Operation 2 Subtraction Operation 3 Multiply Operation 4 Division Operation 5 Greater than Judgment 6 Equal to Judgment 7 Equal to or Greater than Judgment 8 Integration 9 F Reservation Ones Operation 1 Tens Operation 2 Hundreds Operation 3 Thousands Operation 4 Page 58 Operation Setting Coefficient Property 0 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication without decimal 1 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with one decimal 2 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication with two decimals 3 Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplic
231. n Length of IByte Character Example 1Byte 2Byte The slave station responds the read command string format Read Command 03H Data Data content 1 content 2 2Byte Data content 3 2Byte CRC Check 1Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte Name of Character Slave Station Length of IByte Character Example 01H 03H 0000H The slave station responds the write command error string format Write Command 06H Read and Write Error Mark 0000H 0000H Read and Write Error Type 2175H CRC Check Name of Character Slave Station Length of 1Byte Character Example 1Byte 2Byte Ff01H 2Byte 2Byte 0005H 281DH Page 203 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication The slave station responds the read command error string format Name of Read and Write Read and Write Character Slave Staton Command 03H Error Mark Error Type CRC Check Length of Character TByte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte Example FF01H 0005H E41DH 4Definition for Parameter Address of Communication Protocol E Series Frequency inverter not only has many multifunctional function code parameters but some non multifunctional function code parameters Specific read and write properties are as below Function Code Readable writable Parameter P9 Only Readable A000H A001H A002H A003H A004H Non function Code A005H A010H A01
232. n code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope Hundreds Selection 0 9 DI1 DI10 10 14 M1 M5 15 16 VF1 VF2 17 19 Standby 20 79 Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal Ten Thousands Input 2 Selection 0 9 DI1 DI10 10 14 M1 M5 15 16 VF1 VF2 17 19 Standby 20 59 Output Function 00 39 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal and Tens Input 1 Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M2 Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M3 Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M4 Control Word C Intermediate Delay Relay M5 Control Word C Tens Ones 00 59 Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Digital Input Terminal Thousands Hundreds Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal MI Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M2 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M3 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M4 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M5 Connection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M1 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M2 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M3 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s M4 Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s MS Disconnection Delay Time 0 0s 3600 0s LR ea Xa ail gl oe a a Valid State Option of Intermediate Relay 0 Not Negatio
233. n Timing Function to complete its timing running Function Code P3 1 00 determines whether the timing function is valid Function Code P3 1 01 determines the source of fixed running time When at P3 1 01 0 the fixed running time is given by the value set by Function Code P3 1 02 When at P3 1 01 1 or 2 the fixed running time is given by external analog input terminal E Series Frequency inverter provides 2 way analog input terminal VF1 VF2 VF1 and VF2 can input OV 10V voltage or 0 4mA 20mA current As for corresponding relation curve between the input of VFI and VF2 and fixed running time the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2 1 02 in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2 0 13 P2 0 22 and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2 1 04 P2 1 19 At this time the analog input range corresponds to the value given by Function Code P3 1 02 When the Timing Function is effective the frequency inverter needs to restart timing for every start when reaching the reference time the frequency inverter stops automatically During the process of stop the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON When the stop process ends multi functional output terminals output Signal OFF Corresponding multi functional output terminals are Timing Arrival Outp
234. n name Setting scope Factory Value P2 2 21 Model Temperature Arrival Reference 000 C 100 C 075 The module temperature of the frequency inverter reaches the value set by Function Code P2 2 21 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is Module Temperature Arrival 35 Actual module temperature can be viewed through Function Code P5 1 03 Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 22 Current Running Arrival Time Reference 0000 0 6500 0min The frequency inverter needs to restart timing for every start when reaching the value set by Function Code P2 2 22 the frequency inverter continues to run and the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON Corresponding function of multi functional output terminals is Current Running Time Arrival 40 If the set is 0 current running time is not limited Actual time of current running can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 23 when the frequency inverter shuts down the display value of P9 0 23 automatically resets to 0 Page 121 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 4 Group P3 Programmable Function Group P3 0 Basic Group Function code Function name Setting scope 0 End of Single Running and Stop Simple PLC 1 End of Single Running and Save Final Value Running Mode 2 Continuous Running 3 Cycle N Times P3 0
235. nce frequency is the frequency set before stop and the frequency allowance which is conducted through Key A amp Y onthe keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN is saved Note this function code is valid only when the frequency source is set by the keyboard Function Name Setting scope Keyboard Reference i 0 Running Frequency frequency Action 1 Reference frequency Benchmark at running When this function code is adopted to determine the action of Key A amp Y on the keyboard or Terminal UP DOWN it is to confirm what a kind of mode is adopted to correct the frequency and the increase amp decrease shall be done on the basis of running frequency or reference frequency 0 Running Frequency The regulation shall be made on the basis of running frequency Page 82 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 1 Reference frequency The regulation shall be made on the basis of reference frequency The difference between two settings is obvious when the frequency inverter is in the process of acceleration and deceleration namely when the running frequency differs from the reference frequency different Option of parameters leads to great difference Note this function code is valid only when the frequency source is set by the keyboard Function code Function Name Setting scope Benchmark frequency of 0 Highest Frequency PO 1 07 accelerating and 1 Reference frequency Deceleration time 2 100Hz 0 Highest Fre
236. nction Code 06 it means data address 16 digit hexadecimal number when at Function Code 03 it means data initial address ADRESS _ 16 digit hexadecimal number Slave Station Responds refer to data address when at function code 06 16 digit hexadecimal number refer to data number when at function code 03 Sending of Host Machine when at Function Code 06 it means data address 16 digit hexadecimal number when at Function Code 03 it means data initial address 16 digit hexadecimal number Slave Station Responds when at Function Code 06 it means data address 16 digit hexadecimal number when at Function Code 03 it means data initial address 16 digit hexadecimal number in N CHK CHECKSUM 16 digit hexadecimal number RTU adopts CRC CHK CHECKSUM which is calculated as per the following steps Step 1 Load 16 digit register with content of FFFFH CRC Register Step 2 Conduct XOR operation for the first byte of the communication data and the contents of CRC Register and store the results into CRC Register Step 3 Move l1bit of the contents of CRC Register to the minimum significant bit and fill in 0 to the maximum significant bit and check the minimum significant bit of CRC Register Step 4 If the minimum significant bit is 1 the CRC Register and preset value conduct XOR operation If the minimum significant bit is 0 no action is taken Step 5 After repeat 8 times of Step 3 and 4 the handling to this b
237. ncy inverter outputs Signal ON and the corresponding multi functional output terminal is overload pre alarm of the motor 6 The overload inverse time characteristic curve of E Series Frequency inverter is shown in the figure below Time 4 4mins 2mins Imins pe 30s sf Tn _______ 150 200 Overload inverse time characteristic curve Page 93 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Group P1 1 Expansion Group Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 00 Broken Line V F Point 1 Frequency 000 00Hz P1 1 02 000 00 P1 1 01 Broken Line V F Point 1 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 P1 1 02 Broken Line V F Point 2 Frequency P1 1 00 P1 1 04 000 00 P1 1 03 Broken Line V F Point 2 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 P1 1 04 Broken Line V F Point 3 Frequency P1 1 02 Motor rated frequency 000 00 P1 1 05 Broken Line V F Point 3 Voltage 000 0 100 0 000 0 The above functions define V F Curve with multi point broken line and the voltage of the above broken points is the percentage relative to the rated voltage of the motor V F Curve with multi point broken line is given based on the load characteristics of the motor but attention shall be paid that the relationship between three voltage points and frequency points must meet P1 1 00 lt P1 1 02 lt P1 1 04 P1 1 01 lt P1 1 03 lt P1 1 05 refer to the Description in the figure below Voltage A
238. ncy source is PID Reference Acceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions Deceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions PID Reference Source 0 The reference source is given from P4 0 01 PID Value Reference The reference value is given by the users based on actual needs which is the percentage relative to P4 0 04 PID Feedback Source PULS Reference DI6 PID Action Direction PID Direct Action The feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Reverse Action The smaller the feedback is the smaller the frequency is PID Reference Feedback Range Set based on actual feedback range Distance Set value 1 Distance Set value 2 The users preset based on actual needs unit determined based on calculation Impulse Count per Distance Calculate the setting based on formula Option of DI2 Terminal function Define Terminal DI2 as Length Reset Terminal Option of DIS Terminal function Define DI5 Terminal as Encoder Phase A Input Option of DI6 Terminal function Define DIS Terminal as Encoder Phase B Input PID Reference displayed value Display the given line speed PID Feedback displayed value Display actual line speed Actual Distance Value displayed value Display actual distance Minimum Input of PULS 000 00 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of PULS 00
239. nd YO2 through externally connected T O expansion card Two way Relay Output T1 amp T2 Two way Relay Output T1 amp T2 6 way digital input terminal DI1 DI6 in which D16 can connect high speed Impulse Input One way Impulse Output Terminal FMP One way Impulse Output Terminal FMP Use Terminal YO FMPas FMP Use Terminal YO FMPas FMP Note YO FMP Terminal is common terminal of YO and FMP but only one can be used at the same time select through function code P2 1 20 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 00 D1 Terminal Function 0 59 01 FWD Running P2 0 01 DI2 Terminal Function 0 59 04 REV Jogging P2 0 02 DI3 Terminal Function 0 59 09 Multiplex Directive Terminal 1 P2 0 03 DI4 Terminal Function 0 59 12 Multiplex Directive Terminal 4 P2 0 04 DI5 Terminal Function 0 59 13 Fault Reset P2 0 05 DI6 Terminal Function 0 59 00 P2 0 06 DI7 Terminal Function 0 59 00 P2 0 07 DI8 Terminal Function 0 59 00 P2 0 08 DI9 Terminal Function 0 59 00 P2 0 09 DI10 Terminal Function 0 59 00 Page 100 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters The above function codes are used to set the functions of digital input terminals and the functions for option are shown in the table below Setting value Function Description No Function Define the not in service terminals as Unused malfunctions to prevent Forward Runnin
240. nd additional 4 I O Expansion Cards with No DI7 DI10 can be adopted VFI and VF2 can also be set as digital input through Function Code P2 1 23 and P2 1 24 The digital input terminal adopts internal power by factory default which is valid for short circuit to Terminal COM indicated as 1 and invalid for disconnection indicated as 0 it also can make its indicated effect reverse through setting Function Code P2 1 00 and P2 1 01 When VF is used as digital input the short circuit of 10V Power Terminal of the frequency inverter and VF is valid but invalid for disconnection and the indicated effect can also be reversed through Function Code P2 1 25 Terminal DI1 DI3 can also be used to set the delay effect time through Function Code P2 1 26 P2 1 2 and available for the occasions that require to delay the signal effect Page 179 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case i Ti t Ery Setting for Terminal n e i i Delay Time i DI P2 1 26 aes mere D2 P2 1 27 DB P2 1 28 Signal Input Signal Action Time Point Time Point T is the delayed time 2 Digital Output CDI E100 Series Frequency inverter has three multi functional output terminals that is YO T1 and T2 CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter is configured with three multi functional output terminals that is YO T1 and T2 Besides it can externally connect I O Expansion Card and then additional two I O Expansion Cards c
241. ne Terminal DI2 as Length Reset Terminal DI6 Terminal Function Define Terminal DI6 as Length Input Terminal PID Reference displayed value Display the given line speed PID Feedback displayed value Display actual line speed Actual Length Value displayed value Display actual length value Minimum Input of PULS Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of PULS Maximum Input of PULS Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of PULS Define relation curve between im pulse frequency input and PID feedback PULS Filtering time When the field impulse signal is easily interrupted please increase the filtering time to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the longer the filtering time the slower the detected response speed is Page 191 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Factory Description Attribution value Function code Function name The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is the larger the adjustment volume is and the faster the response is but the too large value can generate the system oscillation the smaller the value of KPI is the more stable the system is and the slower the response is Proportional Gains KP1 The greater the value of Integral Time Til is the slower the response is and the more stable the output is the worse the fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is
242. nected but disconnected after waiting for 5 0s 1 1 4 l 1 1 DI2 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 DB I f 1 l l 1 1 1 1 t Normal M2 Signal l i l 1 i J 1 J 1 1 l l a e tl Delay Time o Delay Time o Reserve M2 Signal Connection Disconnection l f l 1 T Page 172 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 13 Internal Timer Function E Series Frequency inverter has two built in timers their start shutdown timing and timer reset can be realized through digital input terminal The fixed time arrival can output the signals through multi functional output terminal Start and Stop Timing of Timer _ Timer 1 Ones of P3 2 23 The count time of Timer reaches the value set by P3 2 24 Timer Input Terminal Terminal Function HB 48 49 Timer 1 Time Arrival Multifunctional Output Terminal Function 42 L Timer 2 Tens of P3 2 23 The count time of n Internal Timer 2 reaches the ae Timer Hundreds Timer value set by P3 2 25 Timer 2 Time Arrival of P3 2 23 Control Multifunctional Output Word Terminal Function 43 P3 2 23 The count time of Timer 1 reaches the value set by P3 2 2 Timer 2 Thousands of P3 2 23 Timer Time Arrival but Timer 2 Time Non arrival Multifunctional Timing Output Terminal Function 44 Unit The count time of Timer 2 fails to reach the value set
243. nection are completed A If connection is correct B If stub or screw remains in device C If screws are fastened firmly D If bare conductor on terminal contacts with other terminals Page 31 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 1 Option of operating mode E Series Frequency inverters provide 3 control modes including keyboard operation terminal operation and communication operation The user can select relative control mode as per onsite circumstances and working requirements See 7 1 for specific selection 4 2 Test run and inspection 4 2 1 Precautions and inspection before test run 1 Input power can be connected only after front lid is installed Do not remove external lid when powered otherwise it may lead to electric shock 2 Do not get close to the frequency inverter or the load when selecting re start because it may suddenly restart after being stopped just a moment ago Even though the frequency inverter can restart its mechanical system can safeguard individual safety otherwise it may cause hurt to human body Dangerous wy 5 8 3 Because function setting can defunction the stop button it is required to install an independent emergency button otherwise it may cause hurt to human body 1 Do not touch the radiator or resistor because its temperature is very high otherwise it may lead to burn 2 Because low speed can be ea
244. ng position Warning 1 Prevent from sunniness Don t use in the open air directly 2 Don t use in the corrosive gas and liquid environment 3 Don t use in the oil fog and splash environment 4 Don t use in the salt spray environment 5 Don t use in the moist and rain environment 6 Please equip the unit with filters device if metal dust or fiber wadding existing in air 7 Do not use the unit in mechanical shock or vibration condition 8 It is necessary to adopt cooling measure if ambient temperature is higher than 40 C 9 It is recommended to use the unit in temperature range of 10 C 40 C because fault maybe occur in overcool or overheat condition 10 Keep the unit away from power supply noise high power application such as electric welder should impact application of the unit 11 Emissive material should impact application of the unit 12 Keep the unit away from combustible material attenuant and solvent For ensuring perfect performance and long term service life please comply with the abovementioned advices while installing E Series Frequency inverter to prevent the unit from damage Page 15 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Option of the installation space For vertical installation of E Series Frequency inverters adequate cooling room should be left so as to ensure effective cooling air outlet air
245. nufactured in 1988 or later on by Mitsubishi Electric EG and SG series manufactured in 1984 or later on by Fuji Electric CDM Series Circuit Breakers made by DELIXI Group Co Ltd 3 Installation of the electromagnetic contactor MC The frequency inverter may be used even if no electromagnetic contactor is installed on the power supply side Electromagnetic contactor can take the place of MCCB for the sequence break of the main circuit However when the primary side is switched off the regeneration brake will not function and the motor will stop running When the primary side is closed open the electromagnetic contactor can cause loads to start stop but frequent close open will lead to frequency inverter fault Therefore while using the brake resistor unit you can always realize sequential control through the trip contact of the overload relay when the electromagnetic contactor is switched off 4 Phase sequence connection of the terminals The phase lines of the input power supply can be connected to any one of the terminals R S or T on the terminal board regardless of phase sequences 5 AC reactor When an frequency inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600KVA or beyond or when a phase lead capacitor power factor compensator is connected or disconnected the peak current through the input power circuit will be so strong that it will damage the rectifier frequency inverter Installing a DC reactor option
246. nverter runs after it is normally accelerated to reference frequency In the process of deceleration if the bus voltage resets to corresponding voltage of the setting value of P6 1 17 the frequency inverter stops slowing down and keeps running at current frequency When at P6 1 14 2 in case of interrupt power supply or sudden reduction of voltage after the bus voltage reduces to below corresponding voltage of the setting value of P6 1 16 the frequency inverter slows down and runs after it slows down to OHz and the bus voltage hasn t recovered the frequency inverter stops Voltage Judgment for Suspension Bus voltage A of Momentary Action 1 1 1 1 Voltage Judgment for Ef Suspension of f Momentary Action _____ ___ 4 a H Voltage Judgment for it Suspension of H Woy Momentary Action l ii o o Time 1 Li 1 gt 1 Woy I oot Running Frequency He i uo P6 1 14 1 od Deceleration l oy i Woy l i A i I Time i L woa H l u i Deceleratibn Acceleration Running Frequency l Process Process l l i 1 I P6 1 14 2 i i Shutdown by Deceleration l ii l Time 1 l 1 I 1 in Deceleration Process Page 151 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P6 1 18 Off load Protection Selection 0 Valid 1 Invalid 0 00 0 100 0 Motor Rated Rotating Speed 0 0s 60 0s 01 0 P6 1 19 Off load Detection L
247. o pel press A Vkey to movethe data it P0 0 00 Press ENTER key one time to display current value of the parameter for example 0 Press A V gt gt to change value P0 0 10 displayed to P0 0 10 the ENTER y Press A V gt gt to change value of the parameter for instance change to 1 Press ENTER to confirm if do not change press MODE key to return Check whether factory set value of the parameter is010 0 at thesame time the pointerpoints to the last digital bit 0 010 0 Press A V gt gt to change value displayed to 016 1 then ENTER Press ENTER to confirm the change and return to parameter display state P0 0 02 after confirmed parameter code shall automatically increase by 1 at this time value of parameter P0 0 01 has been changed to 1 Y Press MODE once to return to monitoring mode Data storage writes in 016 0 the parameter displays that the acceleration time is changed to 016 0 from 010 0 and then itis to return to theparameter that displays P0 0 12 at thistime If directly press MODE instead of ENTER is step5 the keyboard shall return to display P0 0 10 and the data changed is not stored Accehyt u8 654546y41ion times is still 010 0 Then press MODE again return to running under monitoring mode to display the setfrequency Note And it is impossible to modify data under following condit
248. o be set as Counter Input Function 28 When the impulse frequency is higher Terminal DI6 must be adopted When actual counting value reaches the reference value set by P3 1 11 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is Reference Counting Value Arrival 8 When actual counting value reaches the reference value set by P3 1 12 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter can output Signal ON Corresponding multi functional output terminal function is Reference Counting Value Arrival 9 In the counting process the reset operation to actual counting value can be realized through digital input terminal Corresponding digital input terminal function is Counter Reset 29 Actual counting value can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 12 Actual Counting value z P3 1 11 Reference Counting Value Arrival Multi functional Output Terminal Output Count Impulse Count Impulse Input Terminal Input Function 28 P2 0 28 P2 0 32 8 A Designated Counting Value Arrival gt Multi functional Out put Reference 2 Ea Terminal Output Count Counting Valu P2 0 28 P2 0 32 9 P3 1 12 Reset Count Reset A gt P2 0 00 P2 0 09 29 Count Impulse Input il J A A IL J 2 3 24 25 26 41 42 43 1 Count Reset Input 1 t Reference Count
249. od as usual 1 Start from Zero Speed Track up from zero frequency and adopt this method when start after longer stop time 2 Start from Highest Frequency Track down from highest frequency Note this function code is only valid when the start mode is speed tracking start i e P1 0 10 1 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 0 12 Start Frequency 00 00Hz 10 00Hz 00 00 P1 0 13 Hold Time of Start Frequency 000 0s 100 0s 000 0 Start Frequency refer to running frequency when the frequency inverter starts In order to ensure that the motor has a certain start torque proper start frequency shall be given If the setting is too great the overcurrent may occur When the reference frequency is less than start frequency the frequency inverter cannot start and is at ready mode when jogging it is not subject to the impact of start frequency Hold Time of Start Frequency refer to the running time of starting the frequency during the process of start Page 90 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope 000 100 000 0s 100 0s Factory Value 000 000 0 Function name Starting DC Brake Current Function code P1 0 14 P1 0 15 Starting DC Brake Time Starting DC Brake Current refer to the output current in the process of starting DC brake which is the percentage relative to rated current of the motor the larger the starting DC brake current the greater
250. ode the function code has the prefix with U Function Code Setting scope Explanation U0 0 01 Function When the parameter of function code is parameter U0 0 00 UX X XX except set it is deemed that this function code is selected as user customization Option of function code 30 parameters of function Group P7 0 U0 0 00 UX X XX except codes can be selected and set at most for group P7 and P8 displays the for group P7 and P8 Verification Mode P0 0 01 2 Only display the modified parameters in case of any difference of function code between reference value and factory value it is deemed that the parameters are changed the function code has the prefix with C in verification mode Page 40 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Description for Tables of Function Parameters 1 Function parameters of E Series Frequency inverter are divided into 9 groups as per the functions Each group includes several sub groups and each sub group includes several function codes which can be set with different values 2 PX X X X in function sheet or other section of the manual denotes X X function code of sort X X For example P0 0 01 denotes function code 01 of sort P0 0 3 Content explanation of function sheet Column 1 Function Code serial number of function code parameter Column 2 Function Name full name of function pa
251. of Frequency Source A P0 0 04 if it is needed to use please refer to the setting method for Function Code P0 0 04 to set Function Name Setting scope Adjustment Volume of Frequency Source B at 000 150 superposition When the reference frequency of frequency inverter is given by Frequency Source A B and Frequency Source A B it defaults Ato main reference and B to auxiliary Reference This function code determines the regulation size of Frequency Source B which is the percentage relative to the scope of Frequency Source B set by Function Code P0 2 01 At P0 2 01 0 the frequency of Frequency Source B is regulated relative to Highest Frequency At PO 2 01 1 the frequency of Frequency Source B is regulated relative to frequency of Frequency Source A Page 80 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Digital Reference P0 0 08 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 External Terminal VF2 Reference 3 Multiplex Directive Reference Upper Limit Frequency 4 PULS Reference DI6 Source 5 Communication Reference 6 Operation Result 1 7 Operation Result 2 8 Operation Result 3 9 Operation Result 4 This function code determines the source of the upper limit frequency 0 Digital Reference P0 0 08 The upper limit frequency is determined by the value set by Function Code P0 0 08 1 External Terminal VF1 Reference 2 Extern
252. omatic Regulation on Output Frequency related parameters of PID are given in Group P4 and the use methods of PID are as below Frequency PID Parameter 1 Superposition Pa0 01 eter PO 1 00 gt PID Value Proportional Gain I PO 1 01 Reference Integral Time P4 0 06 l PO 1 02 Derivative Time PID Output 1 Option for PID Action Deviation Property I Option for i Reference i PROS Frequency Drive tg Source Direction Limit pig T Source Motor P4 0 00 0 03 0 arameter 2 a 0 04 1 P4 0 03 P4 0 08 PID P 2 mis P0 0 04 8 Proportional Gain P4207 P4 0 10 I Integral Time P4 0 11 Derivative Time l P4 0 12 Vv Switch I Controlled Condition Target P4 0 13 7 P40 14 l P4 0 15 Feedback Signal y eedback Filteri eedbac Disposal Feedback Filtering Feedback 1 Disposa Friar time Source aa Detection Display P4 0 09 P4 0 02 P2 0 13 P2 0 22 P2 1 03 P2 1 19 The frequency inverter has 2 built in equivalent PID computing units the performance parameters can be preset separately to realize optimum usage of regulating speed and accuracy the users can use multi functional terminals or setting deviation adjustment to freely switch different regulation performance required by different stage Page 176 7 1 16 Wobbulating Function Function code Function name Chapter 7 Common Function an
253. on card At this moment the function of keyboard potentiometer will be replaced by the function of Terminal Vf3 Page 220 Appendix 4 Expansion Card of Encoder Appendix 4 Expansion Card of Encoder 1 Introduction CDI E180 Series can realize Closed loop Vector Control against different load motor which is required to different encoder Accordingly there are many various expansion cards of the encoder with specific types as below Type Name Description Differential input of PG card Max Speed 100kHz E180 PG1 without frequency dividing Differential Input Signal Amplitude output 7V UVW differential input of PG Max Speed 100kHz E180 PG2 card without frequency dividing Differential Input Signal Amplitude output 7V E180 PG3 Open collector input of PG Card Max Speed 100kHz 2 Mechanical Installation The frequency inverter shall be installed when it switched off completely Align I O expansion card with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency inverter and then fix them with screws Appearance of E180 PG1 Appearance of E180 PG2 Appearance of E180 PG3 Page 221 Appendix 4 Expansion Card of Encoder 3 Description for Control Terminal Definition for E180 PG1 Name of Terminal Wiring Terminal Signal Description Positive Encoder A Signal Negative Encoder A Signal Positive Encoder B Signal Negative Encoder B
254. on molding machine with reduced voltage starting oil pump motor see circuit as following Circuit Frequency Reduced Voltage Breaker _ inverter Starting Device gt Oil Pump Motor Power supply cable is lead from front end of main cable of the reduced voltage starting device or back end of the circuit breaker and is connected to the power supply incoming end of the frequency inverter during modification the output end of the frequency inverter is connected to the input end of main circuit with the reduced voltage starting Page 187 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Description for Parameters of Injection Molding Machine Means that the users don t need to modify the parameters in general Means that the users can set the parameters based on actual conditions Function code Function name Description Attribution Option for Running PO 0 03 Control Mode Start through External Terminal DI Option of A P0 0 04 Frequency Source Frequency Source A selects VF1 Channel and connects voltage signal Option of B PO 1 01 Frequency Source Frequency Source B selects VF2 Channel and connects flow signal Option of Frequency P0 1 00 Source 0 Selects Frequency Source A Voltage Signal of VF1 Channel PO 0 07 Maximum frequency 50 00Hz Highest frequency of the frequency inverter that allows running P0
255. on of Intermediate Delay Relay Control Word B Function code Setting value for unit s digit Tonon Description 0 Input 1 If input 1 is true the logic result is true If input 1 is false the logic result is false Input 1 and NOT If input 1 is true the logic result is false If input 1 is false the logic result is true Input 1 and Input 2 AND If Input 1 and Input 2 are true the logic result is true or false Input 1 and Input 2 OR Any one of Input 1 and Input 2 is true the logic result is true Input 1 and Input 2 XOR If Input 1 and Input 2 are opposite logic the logic result is true If Input 1 and Input 2 have same logic the logic result is false Page 170 The valid reference of Input 1 is valid The valid Reference of Input 2 is invalid If input 1 is true the logic result is true If input 2 is true and input 1 is false the logic result is true the logic result is false Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Function Setting value for code unit s digit Function Description Valid reference of Input If Input 1 Rising Edge is true the logic 1 Rise Edge is valid result is true Valid reference of Input If Input 2 Rising Edge is true the logic 2 Rise Edge is invalid result is false Reverse valid signal of If Input 1 Rising Edge is true the logic Input 1 Rising Edge result is reverse Input 1 Rise Edge is valid and output
256. op 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Motor Overload Tens Input Default Phase Hundreds Output Default Phase Thousands External Default Ten Thousands Communication Abnormality Fault Protective Action Selection 2 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Motor Overload Tens Feedback Loss Hundreds User Customerized Fault 1 Thousands User Customerized Fault 2 Ten Thousands Power on Time Arrival Fault Protective Action Selection 3 Ones Running Time Arrival 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Tens Encoder Abnormality 0 Free Stop Hundreds Parameter Read Write Abnormity 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode Thousands Motor Overhear 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ten Thousands Fault of 24V Power Supply 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode Fault Protective Action Selection 4 0 Free Stop 1 Stop by its Mode 2 Continuous Running Ones Larger Speed Deviation Tens Motor Overspeed Hundreds Initial Position Error Thousands Reservation Ten Thousands Reservation Page 67 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Continuous Frequency when at Fault Running Selection Setting scope 0 Running at Current Frequency 1 Running at Reference frequency 2 Running at Upper Frequency 3 Running at Lower Frequency 4 Running at Ba
257. ory Value P5 0 18 Function Password Protection 0 Modifiable 1 Non modifiable 2 Allowable Modification to GP Type This function code is used to set whether the parameters of the frequency inverter can be modified When at P5 0 18 0 the parameters of all function codes can be modified When at P5 0 18 1 the parameters of all function codes can only be viewed but not be modified such a way can effectively prevent the parameters of the function from incorrect modification When at P5 0 18 2 Function Code P0 0 00 is allowed to modify Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 0 No Operation Page 144 Parameter Initialization 00 No Operation 01 Clearance of Record Information 09 Reset to Factory Parameter excluding motor parameter correction group password group 19 Reset to Factory Parameter excluding motor parameter password group 30 Users Current Parameter Backup 60 Reset to User Backup Parameters 100 999 Reset to User Factory Parameters Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 1 Clearance of Record Information Clear fault record information accumulative running time accumulative power on time and accumulative power consumption of the frequency inverter 9 Reset to factory parameter excluding motor parameter correction group password group The frequency inverter resets to factory parameter excluding motor parameter correction g
258. outlet Over pe air outlet 150mm o o over 100mm 4 gt over 100mm 4 gt VRE air inlet air inlet 150mm Installation space of E frequency inverters 1 The spaces to be left above below and on the two sides of the frequency inverter are required both for the model with open bracket IP00 and that with closed bracket IP20 2 Permissible temperature at the air inlet 10 C 40 C 3 Adequate cooling spaces should be reserved both above and below the frequency inverter so as to facilitate gas admission and emission Attention 4 Do not drop anything into the air passage during installation Otherwise the fan might be damaged 5 Mount filtering devices at the air inlet in cases of floating fiber or cotton or heavy dust Page 16 3 2 Wiring of the Peripherals and Optional parts The standard method to connect E Series Peripheral Equipment and Optional Components is as below Three phase AC Power Supply 50 60HZ x Xx x D D D Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter Peripherals and Optional parts Description Be used for rapidly cutting off the fault current of the frequency Moulded Case Circuit n Breaker MCCB inverter and preventing fault of power supply from the frequency
259. p P5 0 Basic Group Keyboard JOG Key Function Reference 0 Invalid 1 Forward Jogging 2 Reverse Jogging 3 Forward and Reverse Switch Keyboard STOP Key Stop Function 0 Only valid in Keyboard Operation Mode 1 Valid for any Mode LED Running Display Parameter 1 H 0001 H FFFF Bit00 Running Frequency Hz BitO1 Reference frequency Hz Bit02 Output Current A Bit03 Output Voltage V Bit04 Bus Voltage V Bit05 Output Torque Bit06 Output Power kW BitO7 Input Terminal State BitO8 Output Terminal State Bit09 VF1 Voltage V Bit10 VF2 Voltage V Bit11 Customized Display Value Bit12 Actual Count Value Bit13 Actual Length Value Bit14 PID Reference Bit15 PID Feedback Page 62 LED Running Display Parameter 2 H 0000 H FFFF Bit00 Impulse frequency 0 01kHz BitO1 Feedback Speed Hz Bit02 PLC Phase Bit03 VF1 Voltage Correction V Bit04 VF2 Voltage Correction V Bit05 Line Speed Bit06 Current Power on Time min BitO7 Current Running Time min BitO8 Residual Running Time min Bit09 Frequency of Frequency Source A Hz Bitl0 Frequency of Frequency Source B Hz Bit11 Communication Set value Hz Bit12 Impulse frequency Hz Bit13 Encoder Feedback Speed r min Bit14 Actual Distance Value Bit15 User Standby Monitoring Value 1 before before Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters
260. pplication Case 7 2 1 PID control for Water Supply at Permanent Pressure Circuit Breaker 5 AC 3PH L2 Pi Suppl ower Supply sav Rempte Pressure J auge PID Feedback In Pressure C Transmitter line OR 29 Motor Multi functional Output Relay 1 The default is the running signal Reference parameters P2 0 29 Multi functional Output Relay 2 The default is fault indication Reference parameters P2 0 30 Note if it is the remote pressure gauge put J5 1 VF1 Dial Switch to U side and if it is the pressure transmitter put J5 1 to I side Description for Constant Voltage Water Supply Parameter Means that the users don t need to modify the parameters in general Means that the users can set the parameters based on actual conditions Function code Function name Factory value Description Attribution Option for Running PO 0 03 Control Mode 0 Start Key Run on Control Panel 1 Start the External Terminal DII P2 0 00 01 PO 0 04 Frequency Source A 8 The frequency source is PID Reference PO 0 11 Acceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions PO 0 12 Deceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions P4 0 00 PID Reference Source 0 The reference source is given from P4 0 01 PID Value Reference The reference value is given by the users base
261. pter 6 Description of Parameters Running current Output current overlimit Output current overlimit detected i i i 1 i i i i Time i 1 i signal f i 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 C Time t m 1 1 The output current overlimit is the percentage of rated current of the motor T refers to the delay time of detecting out current overlimit i 1 i i iF 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 i i 1 1 i IT i Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P2 2 15 Current Level Detection 1 000 0 300 0 100 0 P2 2 16 Detection Width of Current Level 1 000 0 300 0 000 0 When the running current of the frequency inverter is within positive and negative frequency with detected width of the current level detection 1 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON When the running current of the frequency inverter is beyond positive and negative detected width of current level detection 1 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is Current 1 Arrival Output 28 refer to the Description of the figure below Output current Current level AXN f Detection width of current level 1 detection 1 Detection width of current level 1 1 Lt i i Time 3
262. quency The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to highest frequency and it can change with the change of the highest frequency at this time 1 Reference frequency The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to highest frequency and it can change with the change of the reference frequency at this time 2 100Hz The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to 100Hz and it is a fixed value at this time Note the jogging acceleration and deceleration time is also subject to its control Function code Function Name Setting scope PO 1 08 Jogging running frequency 000 00 Highest Frequency PO 1 09 Jogging Acceleration time 0000 0s 6500 0s PO 1 10 Jogging Deceleration time 0000 0s 6500 0s The function codes above define the reference frequency and acceleration and deceleration time when the frequency inverter is at jogging running Function Name Setting scope Factory Value Acceleration time 2 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Deceleration time 2 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Acceleration time 3 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Deceleration time 3 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Acceleration time 4 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Deceleration time 4 0000 0s 6500 0s Machine type Page 83 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters The function codes above have the same definitions with
263. r 7 Common Function and Application Case 2 Analog Output E Series Frequency inverter support 2 way analog output which can be voltage signal or can also be current signal oen Shift switch J6 to U side which enable to receive the signal at OV 10V DC Current source Shift switch J6 to I side which enable to receive the signal at 4mA 20mA Voltage Shift switch J7 to U side which enable to receive the signal at OV 10V DC source Current E Shift switch J7 to I side which enable to receive the signal at 4mA 20mA FM1 and FM2 can indicate internal running parameters through output analog mode The indicated contents of the parameters can be selected through Function Code P2 0 33 and P2 0 34 The analog output signal can be corrected through Function Code P2 0 36and P2 0 37 before output the correction effect is shown in the figure below FM Terminal Output After Correction Parameters to be output gt Before Correction Corrected Output Y aX b X means running parameters to be output a means output gain and b is output offset 7 1 18 Digital Input Output Use 1 Digital Input CDI E100 Series Frequency inverter has 6 digital input terminals with No DI1 DI6 in which DI6 is high speed input terminal CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter is configured with 6 digital input terminals with No DI1 DI6 in which DI6 is high speed input terminal Besides it can externally connect I O Expansion Card a
264. rameter Column 3 Setting Scope scope of valid set value of function parameters Column 4 Factory Setting original set value of function parameters when delivered out of the factory Column5 Change Limit change property of function parameters that is whether change and changing conditions are allowed Column 6 Reference Page page referred to of function parameters Modification limit of parameter is explained as below Jg Denote that the set value of the parameter is modifiable under stop or running state of the frequency inverter Se Denote that the set value of the parameter is not modifiable under running state of the frequency inverter Denote that the value of the parameter is actual testing value and not modifiable O Denote that this parameter is allowed to be modified only at P5 0 18 2 A Denote that this function in E Series is invalid and not allowed to be modified Explanation Please read the manual carefully while modifying parameter of frequency inverter And contact our Company for any problem occurs during operation No data submits to customer modification violation of it maybe causes serious fault or significant property loss of which consequences should be born by User Page 41 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 1 PO Group Basic Function Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Group P0 0 Bas
265. ration Result 4 Check the value of operation result 4 User Standby Monitoring Value 1 User Standby Monitoring Value 2 User Standby Monitoring Value 3 User Standby Monitoring Value 4 User Standby Monitoring Value 5 P9 0 50 Check the value of user special function P9 0 51 Check the value of user special function P9 0 52 Check the value of user special function P9 0 53 Check the value of user special function P9 0 54 Check the value of user special function Corresponding Relationship of Input and Output Terminal State Whether the vertical line of the digital tube of each digit lights on it indicates that whether the input and output terminal of each digit has the signal or not If it lights on it indicates that corresponding input terminal of this vertical line has signal input or the output terminal has signal output The display rules of Function Code P9 0 07 are shown as below VF2 M5 M3 DI9 DI7 DIS DI3 DII Hfi VFL M4 M2 DII0 DIB DI6 DI4 DI2 The display rules of Function Code P9 0 08 are shown as below M is internal Intermediate Delay Relay M4 M2 YO2 T2 YO M5 M3 MI YO Tl Page 157 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 1 Common Function 7 1 1 Start and Stop Control E Series Frequency inverter has three kinds of start and stop control modes keyboard control terminal control and communication
266. re used to correct analog input VF to get rid of the impact of VF input zero offset or gain When leaving the factory the function parameters of this group have been corrected when resetting to factory value the reset value is the value after factory correction Generally the application site is not required to conduct correction Actual Voltage use the measuring instruments to measure the voltage between terminal VF and terminal GND such as multi meter etc Voltage Display the voltage display value from the sampling of the frequency inverter refers to voltage P9 0 19 P9 0 20 display before VF correction of Group P9 When correcting input two voltage values on each VF input terminal and then input actually measured voltage value and display voltage to corresponding function codes the frequency inverter can conduct correction automatically Page 154 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P8 1 13 FMI target voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 14 FMI actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 15 FM target voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 16 FM1 actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 17 FM2 target voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 18 FM2 actual voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V 2 000 P8 1 19 FM2 target voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 P8 1 20 FM2 actual voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 8 000 The function codes of this group are used to correct analog
267. requency 050 00 Limit Torque Control REV Frequency P1 1 17 H 000 00Hz Highest Frequency 050 00 Limit This function code is used to set the highest frequency in forward and reverse running when the frequency inverter runs in torque control mode i e P1 1 13 1 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value PITAS Torque Acceleration Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 P1 1 19 Torque Deceleration Time 0000 0s 6500 0s 0000 0 These two function codes are used to set the acceleration time of the torque rise and the deceleration time of the torque decline when running in torque control mode i e P1 1 13 1 They may be set to 0 for the occasions requiring rapid response Page 99 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 3 Group P2 Input Output Terminal Function Group P2 0 Basic Group The input and output terminals of CDI E100 Series and E180 Series are configured as below CDI E100 Series CDI E180 Series 6 way digital input terminal DI1 DI6 in which DI6 can connect high speed Impulse Input Additional 4 way digital input terminal DI7 DI10 is added through externally connected I O expansion card 2 way Analog Input VF1 amp VF2 2 way Analog Input VF1 amp VF2 2 way Analog Input FM1 amp FM2 2 way Analog Input FM1 amp FM2 One way Collector Output YO Use Terminal One way Collector Output YO YO FMP as YO can add additional 2 way Use Terminal YO FMP as YO YOI a
268. requency Width upon Arrival 000 0 100 0 When the running frequency of frequency inverter is within positive and negative frequency with detected width of the reference frequency the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON The reference value of this function code is the percentage relative to the high reference frequency Corresponding function of multi functional output terminals is frequency arrival 4 refer to the Description of the figure below Output 4 frequency Set Detected Width Frequency frequency Detected Width Frequency 1 i Time T gt a k Frequency arrival 4 l at detection signal l l Time gt Detected Width Frequency Detected Reference frequency Width upon Arrival P2 2 02 X Highest Frequency P0 0 07 Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 03 Frequency Detection FDT1 000 00Hz Highest Frequency P2 2 04 FDT1 Lagged Value 000 0 100 0 When the output frequency of the frequency inverter exceeds one value the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON this value is called as Detected Frequency FDT1 When the output frequency of the frequency inverter is lower than a certain value of Detected Frequency FDT1 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF this value is called as Lagged FDT1 Frequency Value Corresponding func
269. rete ete ete ee cee cee cee cee cee cee cee cee cee cee eee OF 5 8 Group P7 User Function Customizations st cet etree steer e reece ett e cesses cee cee cee e ne nee cee ee 6O 5 9 Group P8 7 Manufacturer Functions cc ctt tess cee cs cee cee cee cee cee cee cen ee eee see eeeeee eee ees 70 5 10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter Chapter 6 Deseription of Parametery ssesssincensnnesss ses deeidis adakino ain ese ben ecagnernease 77 6 1 Group 0 m Basic Function tsssssseessesesesesessesesesessensscsesesesessssesesenssoseseseseseeseses 7D 6 2 Group P1 Motor Control Parameter eeereeeeeereereereesesessesssesesseesosseesecseeseeeeeeeeee 88 6 3 Group P2 Input Output Terminal Functions steers cee cr tee cee cee cee cee cee cee seeeeeeeeeee 100 6 4 Group P3 x Programmable Functions ssseesessereesesseesesseossoseosesenoseeseseeseessesseeee J22 6 5 Group P4 Pid Control And Communication Control 1 rrrsrrsrreseere eee eee eee eee teren 133 6 6 Group PS Keyboard Display 6 7 Group P6 Fault Display and Protection Controle tettetett ereere eet eetere err eee eee ereere tet 146 6 8 Group P7 User Function Customization ee TETTEIT cee cee eee eee wee eee wee eee eee eee eee 153 6 9 Group P8 n Manufacturer Function eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee es 154 6 10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ees 156 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case ee nee w
270. ring noise because of electromagnetic interference the noise might affect the signal line and result in the misoperation of the controller Radio noise the noise can be produced from radio transmitters because of high frequency waves emitted from the frequency inverter or cables 8 Countermeasures for interfering noise Aside from using noise filters threading all the connecting wires into a ground metal pipe can also restrain interfering noise generated at the output terminal If we put signal lines over 30cm away the effect of interfering noise will be abated 9 Countermeasures for radio noise Aside from input and output wires the frequency inverter itself also emits noise It will help to handle the problem if we install noise filters at the input and output sides of the frequency inverter or apply shielded lines to the iron case of the frequency inverter It is also very important to make sure that the connecting wire between the frequency inverter and the motor should be as short as possible Page 21 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 10 The wire distance between the frequency inverter and the motor If the total wire length between the frequency inverter and the motor is too long or the carrier frequency of the frequency inverter primary IGBT switch frequency is rather high the harmonic leakage current from the cables will exert negative influence on the frequency inverter and other external
271. roup password group 19 Reset to Factory Parameter excluding motor parameter password group The frequency inverter resets to factory parameter excluding motor parameter password group 30 Users Current Parameter Backup Back up all current function parameters of the users to the memory after the parameters adjustment in disorder the user can easily reset the disordered parameters to back up function parameters 60 Reset to User Backup Parameters Reset to the back up user parameters last time i e reset to the parameters that are backed up last time when P5 0 19 is set at 30 100 999 Reset to User Factory Parameters This function is used to reset special tailor made factory parameter of the users Generally the users cannot conduct operation to this reset Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value 20 User Password 00000 65535 00000 P5 0 20 is the user password reference that is any non zero five digits the password protection function becomes effective When enter into the menu next time if display input correct password and then view and modify the function parameters If you want to cancel the password protection only use the password to enter into system and then change P5 0 20 into 00000 the password protection function becomes invalid P5 1 Expansion Group Function code Function name Description of parameter Display scope Display accumulated running time P5 1 00 Accumulat
272. rter outputs Signal ON Zero current State Refer to the Description of Function Code P2 2 11 and P2 2 12 Module Temperature Arrival When the radiator temperature of the module of the frequency inverter reaches the temperature set by Function Code P2 2 21 output Signal ON Output Current Overlimit Refer to the Description of Function Code P2 2 13 and P2 2 14 Lower Frequency Arrival also output when shut down When the output frequency reaches lower frequency or the reference frequency is less than the lower frequency in stop state output Signal ON Alarm Output When the frequency inverter fails if the fault handling mode is continuous running output Signal ON If the fault handling mode is shutdown by speed reduction output Signal ON in the process of shutdown by speed reduction PLC Phase Completed When each phase of simple PLC is completed output an impulse signal with the width of 200ms Page 109 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting value Function Description 40 Current Running Time Arrival When current running time of the frequency inverter exceeds the value set by Function Code P2 2 22 output Signal ON and the frequency inverter cannot shut down Fault Output Not Output for Undervoltage When the frequency inverter fails and shuts down output Signal ON Output Signal OFF in undervoltage state Timer 1 Timing Arriv
273. s used to set whether the frequency inverter is allowed to run at reverse state When at P1 1 09 0 the frequency inverter is allowed to run at reversal state When at P1 1 09 1 the frequency inverter is prohibited to run at reversal state which is mainly used for the occasions that the load is unable to reverse Note the director of this function code is defined by the set value relative to running direction P0 0 06 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 10 Forward and Reverse Dead Time 0000 0s 3000 0s 0000 0 This function code is used to set the duration time of outputting OHz when the frequency inverter is in the process of forward and reverse switch Page 96 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Pitt Power on Running Selection 0 Running 1 Not Running 0 This function code is used to set when the frequency inverter runs in response to valid running command at the moment of power on When at P1 1 11 0 the frequency inverter directly responds to the running When at P1 1 11 1 frequency inverter can t respond to the running It cannot run until the running command is valid again after it is cancelled Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 12 Droop Control 00 00Hz 10 00Hz 00 00 When more than one motor drive the same load the uneven distribution of the load may occur The droop control decreas
274. ser Function 21 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 22 ser Function 22 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 23 ser Function 23 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 24 ser Function 24 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 25 ser Function 25 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 26 ser Function 26 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 27 ser Function 27 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 28 ser Function 28 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 P7 0 29 ser Function 29 0 0 00 UX X XX exclude P7 P8 0 0 00 Ee eE sa a E E e e it cS i St ay E et G e a 1a a ale a2 aia ala as a ae a aids al eaiseasal ald aired ala The function codes of this group are User Customized Parameter Group The users can summarize the parameters of the function codes except Group P7 and P8 selected from function codes for display to Group P7 0 as User Customized Parameter for easy operation as view and medication and the User Customized Parameter Group is not more than 30 Page 153 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 9 Group P8 Manufacturer Function P8 0 Manufacturer Function Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P8 0 00 Manufacturer Code 00000 65535 00000 This function code is the manufacturer password entry and displays dedicated function code of the
275. sily changed to high speed it is required to confirm safe working scope of the motor and mechanical equipment before operation otherwise it may cause hurt to human body and damage to equipment 3 If necessary separately install a contracting brake otherwise it may cause hurt Attention to human body 4 Do not change connection during operation otherwise the equipment or frequency inverter may be damaged For ensuring operation safety please relieve mechanical connector before first operation to separate motor from mechanical equipment and prevent from dangerous Please perform following inspection before test run A If connection between lead and terminal is correct B If lead thrum cause short circuit C If screw terminal is fastened firmly D If motor is installed firmly 4 2 2 Test run After preparation connect to power supply and inspect if frequency frequency inverter works normally After connected to power supply indicator of number keyboardis luminous Please cut off power supply immediately if any problem abovementioned occurs Page 32 Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running 4 2 3 Operating inspection Please verify following items during operation A If motor rotates smoothly B If rotation direction of motor is correct C If abnormal vibration or noise occurs accompanying with operation of motor D If acceleration and deceleration are smooth E If current match with load v
276. t shall be made according to the formula above 1 CDI E100 Series Brake Brake Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit Resistance Resistance Value Power W S2 Single Phase 220V CDI E100GOR4S2B Built in allowable Max Current 8A 400 80 CDI E100GOR75S2B Built in allowable Max Current 8A 200 CDI E100G1R5S2B Built in allowable Max Current 15A 120 CDI E100G2R2S2B Built in allowable Max Current 15A 80 T2 Three Phase 220V CDI E100GOR4T2B Built in allowable Max Current 8A CDI E100GOR75T2B Built in allowable Max Current 8A CDI E100G1RS5T2B Built in allowable Max Current 15A CDIE100G2R2T2B Built in allowable Max Current 25A T4 Three Phase 220V CDI E100GOR75T4B Built in allowable Max Current 8A CDI E100G1RST4B Built in allowable Max Current 8A CDI E100G2R2T4B Built in allowable Max Current 15A CDI E100G3R7T4B Built in allowable Max Current 15A Page 217 Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts 2 CDI E180 Series Brake Brake Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit Resistance Resistance Value Power W CDI E180GOR75T4B Built in allowable Max Current 10A 600 160 CDI E180G1R5T4B Built in allowable Max Current 10A 400 250 CDI E180G2R2T4B Built in allowable Max Current 15A 250 400 CDI E180G3R7 P5R5T4B Built in allowable Max Current 25A 150 600 CDI E180GSRS5MT4B Built in allowable Max Current 40A 100
277. t Normally closed Input When this terminal state is invalid the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Errl3 and then the fault is handled based on fault protection action mode Frequency Modification Enable When this terminal state is invalid the frequency inverter cannot respond the modification to frequency When this terminal state is valid the frequency inverter responds the modification to frequency PID Action Direction Negation When this terminal state is valid the direction of PID Action is opposite to the direction given by P4 0 03 External Stop Terminal 1 When the running control mode is keyboard control P0 0 03 0 the terminal can stop through this terminal External Stop Terminal 2 In any of running control modes the frequency inverter can slow down and stop at deceleration time 4 through this terminal Page 102 PID Integral Stop When the units digit of P4 2 08 is 1 i e the integral separation is valid and this terminal is valid the functions of integral regulation of PID stops temporarily but the functions of proportional regulation and integral regulation of PID are still valid Setting value Function Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Description 41 PID Parameter Switch When the switch conditions of PID parameters are the terminal P4 0 13 1 this terminal state is invalid adopt PID Parameter 1 When this terminal state is valid a
278. t Frequency Detected Frequency 2 Width upon Arbitrary Arrival 000 0 100 0 we e Zero Current Detection Level 000 0 300 0 100 0 correspond to rated current of motor Delay Time for Zero Current Detection 000 01s 600 00s Output Current Overlimit Value 00 0 No Detection 000 1 300 0 Delay Time for Current Overlimit Detection 000 00s 600 00s Current Level Detection 1 000 0 300 0 Detection Width of Current Level 1 000 0 300 0 Current Level Detection 2 000 0 300 0 Detection Width of Current Level 2 000 0 300 0 VFI Input Lower Limit 00 00V P2 2 20 Model Temperature Arrival Reference 000 C 100 C Current Running Arrival Time Reference 0000 0min 6500 0min MH X Pe We Pe Me Pe XM Me Me Page 53 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters 5 4 Group P3 Programmable Function Pinon Function name Setting scope Factory ee Ree code Value Timit page Group P3 0 Basic Group 0 End of Single Running and Stop P3 0 90 Simple PLC Running cr Running aa sit Mode 2 Continuous Running 122 3 Cycle N Times P3 0 01 Cycle Times N 00000 65000 00000 x Ones Option of Power off Memory 0 No Power off Memory P3002 Memory Hens Stop Memory Selection 00 0 No Stop Memory 1 Stop Me
279. t frequency P0 0 09 Lower frequency 000 00 Upper frequency The upper limit frequency is the Highest Frequency allowed to run set by the users At P0 1 03 0 the set value of Function Code P0 0 08 determines the Highest Frequency that the frequency inverter allows to run The lower limit frequency is the minimum frequency allowed to run set by the users The relationship among Highest Frequency Upper Limit Frequency and Lower Limit Frequency are shown in the figure below Output frequency i Frequency Directive HF Highest Frequency UF Upper Frequency LF Lower Frequency Page 76 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope 0 Running at lower limit frequency Lower frequency operation d 1 Stop o 2 Zero speed Running 0 Run at lower limit frequency When the reference requency is less than the lower limit frequency value set by P0 0 09 the frequency inverter runs at lower limit frequency 1 Stop When the reference frequency is less than the lower limit frequency the frequency inverter stops 2 Zero speed Running When the reference frequency is less than the lower limit frequency the frequency inverter runs at OHz Note when running at 0Hz the frequency inverter can output a certain voltage so special attention shall be paid when in use Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value PO 0 11 Acceleration Time 0000 1s 6500 0s Machine type
280. tage 2 6 000V 9 999V FM target voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V FM2 target voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V FM2 target voltage 1 0 500V 4 000V FM2 target voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V FM2 target voltage 2 6 000V 9 999V 5 10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter Function code Function name Setting scope Ped Ded DX aol Dad Ded Dl Dal DX ad Dad Dl Dal Dad Dd Dl Dal Xa Sort P9 0 Basic Monitoring Parameter P9 0 00 Running Frequency P9 0 01 Reference frequency P9 0 02 Output Current P9 0 03 Output Voltage P9 0 04 Bus Voltage P9 0 05 Page 70 Output Torque Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope Z P9 0 06 Output Power P9 0 07 Input Terminal Status P9 0 08 Output Terminal Status P9 0 09 VFI Voltage P9 0 10 VF2 Voltage P9 0 11 Custom Display Value P9 0 12 Actual Counting Value P9 0 13 Actual Length Value P9 0 14 PID Reference P9 0 15 PID Feedback P9 0 16 PULS Impulse frequency P9 0 17 Feedback Speed P9 0 18 PLC Phase P9 0 19 Voltage before Vfl Correction P9 0 20 Voltage before VF2 Correction P9 0 21 Line Speed P9 0 22 Current Power on Time P9 0 23 Current Running Time P9 0 24 Residual Running Time P9 0 25 Freq
281. talled when it switched off completely Align Expansion Card E180 ZS with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency inverter and then fix them with screws E180 ZS Appearance of E180 ZS Page 224
282. tch Deviation 1 000 0 P4 0 15 020 0 P4 0 15 PID Switch Deviation 2 P4 0 14 100 0 080 0 When at P4 0 13 2 it is to determine whether the switch of PID parameters needs to be done through these two function codes The setting value of these two function codes is the percentage relative to Function Code P4 0 04 PID Reference Feedback Range When the deviation between reference and feedback is less than PID Switch Deviation 1 adopt PID Parameter of P4 0 05 P4 0 07 When the deviation between reference and feedback is greater than PID Switch Deviation 2 adopt PID Parameter of P4 0 10 P4 0 12 When the deviation between reference and feedback is between PID Switch Deviation 1 and PID Switch Deviation 2 PID Parameter is the linear interpolation value of these two groups of PID Parameters refer to the description of the figure below PID Parameter A PID Parameter 1 P4 0 05 P4 0 07 2 P4 0 10 P4 0 12 PID Deviation 1 1 1 1 1 1 PID Parameter 2 oa i 1 1 i i P4 0 14 P4 0 15 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 16 PID Initial Value 000 0 100 0 000 0 P4 0 17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000 00 650 00s 000 00 When the frequency inverter starts first speed it up to initial value of PID at acceleration time and then keep running at initial state of PID after the duration of time reaches the time given by P4 0 17 conduct regulation to PID Initial
283. ted and set through Function Code P0 2 03 Straight Line Set PO 1 19 0 Start the linear speed from start frequency to reference frequency E Series Frequency inverter provides four kinds of linear acceleration and deceleration modes which can be switched among different terminal combinations that are selected through acceleration and deceleration time Curve S 1 Set PO 1 19 1 The output frequency increases or decrease by Curve S Curve S is the used for occasions required gentle start or stop Parameter PO 1 20 and P0 1 21 respectively define the time scale of starting period and ending period of Curve S 1 Curve S 2 Set PO 1 19 2 In acceleration and deceleration of Curve S the rated frequency of the motor is always the inflection point of Curve S Generally it is used for occasions that the high speed areas above rated frequency require acceleration and deceleration 7 1 4 Jogging Function E Series Frequency inverter provides two kinds of the modes to realize jogging function Keyboard Control and Terminal Control Keyboard Control Set the function of multi functional Key JOG as forward jogging or reverse jogging P5 0 00 1or 2 The frequency inverter can use Key JOG to realize Jogging Function when it stops and the jogging running frequency and acceleration and deceleration time can be set through Function Code PO 1 08 P0 1 10 Terminal Control Set the function of multi functional Dix and Dly as forward jogging or reverse
284. ter and the wire distance should be less than 50 meters to prevent misoperation from interference 1 Description for Circuit Wiring of Analog Input Terminal J5 1 controls VFI channel to select voltage current signal input When current signal input is selected switch of J5 is at I side when voltage signal input is selected switch of J5 is at U side J5 2 controls VF2 channel to select voltage current signal input When current signal input is selected switch of J5 is at I side when voltage signal input is selected switch of J5 is at U side 2 Description for Circuit Wiring of Analog Output Terminal J6 controls FM1 channel to select voltage current signal input When current signal input is selected switch of J6 is at I side when voltage signal input is selected switch of J6 is at U side J7 controls Fm1 channel to select voltage current signal input When current signal input is selected switch of J7 is at I side when voltage signal input is selected switch of J7 is at U side Page 27 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 Description for Circuit Wiring of Digital Input Terminal Shielded Cable or Shielded Twisted Pair should try to be used for digital input to avoid interference from external type and the wire distance should be less than 50 meters The wiring diagram on digital input circuit control panel is as below
285. ter gives an alarm of fault run at frequency set by Function Code P6 1 13 Function code Function Name Setting scope P6 1 13 Backup Frequency for Abnormality 000 0 100 0 When at Function Code P6 1 12 4 the setting value of this function code determines the running frequency when the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault which is the percentage relative to highest frequency Page 150 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value 0 Invalid 1 Deceleration 0 2 Stop by Deceleration Action Selection for Momentary P6 1 14 Interruption Judgment Time of Momentary P6 1 15 Interruption Voltage Recovery 000 00s 100 00s P6 1 16 Voltage Judgment for Momentary 60 0 100 0 6 1 Interruption Action Standard Bus Voltage P6 1 17 Voltage Judgment for Suspension 80 0 100 0 a of Momentary Action Standard Bus Voltage When at P6 1 14 0 the frequency inverter continues to run at current frequency in interrupt power supply or sudden reduction of voltage When at P6 1 14 1 in case of interrupt power supply or sudden reduction of voltage after the bus voltage reduces to corresponding voltage of the setting value of P6 1 16 below the frequency inverter slows down and runs after the bus voltage resets to corresponding voltage of the setting value of P6 1 16 above and the duration of time exceeds the time set by P6 1 15 the frequency i
286. tering time of VF1 when the on site analog is easily to be interrupted the filtering time shall be increased to make the detected analog tend to be stable but the greater filtering time makes the response speed of the analog detection become slow how to set needs to balance based on actual situations of the applications Explanation when the analog inputs corresponding frequency the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to highest frequency When the analog inputs corresponding torque the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to digital reference torque When the analog inputs corresponding PID the corresponding reference value is the percentage relative to PID Reference Feedback range When the analog inputs corresponding time the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to running time P3 1 02 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P2 0 18 Minimum Input of Curve 2 00 00V P2 0 20 00 00 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of Curve 2 P2 0 20 Maximum Input of Curve 2 P2 0 18 10 00V 10 00 P2 0 19 100 0 100 0 000 0 Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of Curve 2 P2 0 21 100 0 100 0 100 0 P2 0 22 VF2 Filtering time 00 00s 10 00s 00 10 The functions and use methods of Curve 2 refer to the Description of Curve 1 Page 106 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Fac
287. the active impulse is required to output the users need to match the power internal power or external power of the frequency inverter available and pull up resistor Note allowable limit of internal circuit DC48V 50mA below Dotted line is user configuration the output is passive pulsewithout this part YO FMP 1 i E Series 3 frequency gt Ji amp _UPower supply song inverter 1S i R Resistor La ee 2 ed e p amp a i com O _ Page 30 Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter 3 5 Grounding 1 Grounding resistance value 200V level 1002 or value below it 400V level 102 or value below it 660V level 5Q or value below it 2 Prevent E frequency inverter welding machine motor or other huge current electrical equipment from earthing Ensure all earthing lines and wires of huge current electrical equipment are separately laid inside the pipe 3 Please use approved grounding wire of which length should be as shorter as possible 4 When several E frequency inverters are used in parallel please ground the device as shown by Figure a instead of Figure c which may form a loop 5 Grounding of frequency inverters and motor can be connected as per Figure d Spe St a Correct b Incorrect c Non recommended d Correct e Non recommended 6 Connection inspection Please perform following items if installation and con
288. the faults as overcurrent arising from start DC brake at higher speed Stop DC Brake Current refer to the output current in the process of stop DC brake which is the percentage relative to rated current of the motor The higher the stop DC brake current is the larger the brake force is Stop DC Brake Time refer to the duration of outputting the stop DC brake value in the stop process of the frequency inverter When the stop DC brake time is set at 000 0 the stop DC brake function is valid Page 91 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope Function code Function name Factory Value P1 0 21 Braking Use Rate 000 100 100 This function code is only valid for the frequency inverter of the built in brake unit CDI E100 Series has complete built in brake units but CDI E180 Series 15Kw and below has built in brake units As for duty ratio of adjusting the brake units the higher the brake usage rate is the higher the duty ratio of the brake unit action is and the stronger the brake effect is but the bus voltage fluctuation of the frequency inverter is greater in the brake process Setting scope Function code Function name Factory Value P1 0 22 Carrier Frequency 0 50kHz 16 0kHz 06 0 This function code is used to regulate the carrier frequency of the frequency inverter The regulation of the carrier frequency can lower the noise of the motor and reduce the line to ground leakage current and the
289. the frequency inverter is the same with corresponding parameter on the nameplate of the motor 3 Please confirm that when the running control mode of the frequency inverter is at P0 0 03 0 the panel control is adopted i e only Key RUN on the control panel can identify the running signal 4 Set Function Code P0 0 24 and select the mode of parameter identification If the Complete Identification is selected the Function Code is at P0 0 24 2 press Key ENTER and then press Key RUN the keyboard displays TEST the indicator of RUN lights on and the indicator of TUNE keeps flashing The parameter identification continues running about 30s 60s when the display of ES disappears the indicator of TUNE lights off such a condition means the end of parameter identification the frequency inverter can automatically store the identified the characteristic parameters of the motor into corresponding function code When CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter drives the synchronous motor the feedback signal of the encoder is required before identification the parameters of the encoder must be set correctly In the process of identifying the synchronous motor the rotating action is required the best identification mode is no load dynamic identification if the conditions don t allow and the load dynamic identification can be conducted Page 183 Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case 7 2 A
290. the reference frequency that arrives at Detected Frequency Value 1 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is Frequency 1 Arrival Output 26 refer to the Description of the figure below Output 4 frequency Any Detection Value Detected Width Frequency upon Arrival at Frequency Detected Width Frequency I Time l gt I Any Detected Signal upon Arrival at Frequency Time a Detected Width Frequency Any Detected Width upon Arrival at Frequency 1 P2 2 08 X Highest Frequency P0 0 07 Setting scope Function code Function name Detected Frequency Value 2 upon P2 2 09 Arbitrary Arrival 000 00Hz Highest Frequency Detected Frequency 2 Width upon Arbitrary Arrival P2 2 10 000 0 100 0 The above function codes have the same function with Function Code P2 2 07 and P2 2 08 refer to the Description of P2 2 07 and P2 2 08 for more details Corresponding function of the multi functional output terminals is Frequency 2 Arrival Output 27 Page 118 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Faro D 000 0 300 0 P2 2 11 ero arene etecion 100 0 correspond to rated current of Level motor Delay Time for Zero Current Detection DED SSOOOS When the running current of the frequency
291. the smaller the value of TI1 is the faster the response is and the greater the output fluctuation is the too small value can generate the oscillation Integral Time TI1 The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain can be obtained at low frequency and a constant derivative gain can be obtained at high frequency The longer the derivative time is the greater the adjusting strength is Derivative Time Tdl If the length is required to reach automatic shutdown and the frequency inverter is desired to stop stably the shutdown DC brake can be configured or the following parameters need to be set Function code Setting value Function code Attribution P3 2 00 00002 M1 is determined by Control Word C M1 take the length to reach the signal used for shutdown of the frequency inverter P1017 000 00 Stop DC Braking Initial Frequency P1 0 18 000 0 Stop DC Braking Hold Time P1 0 19 000 Stop DC Braking Current P1 0 20 000 0 Stop DC Braking Time P3 2 07 1039 If the length is required to reach automatic reset the following parameters need to be set After completing the shutdown of the frequency inverter every time the length is reset to zero automatically Function code Setting value Function code Attribution P2 0 01 00 Remove manual length reset function of DI2 e M3 is determined by Control B M1 and M2 are deter
292. tion 1 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Input B of Operation 1 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 1 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Setting Coefficient of Operation 1 00000 65535 The above function codes are used to set input address and setting coefficient of Operation 1 The thousands hundreds tens and ones of Function Code P3 2 28 and Function Code P3 2 29 represent the address of Input A of Operation 1 and Input B of Operation 1 respectively The input address corresponds to all function codes e g Address 0005 corresponds to Function Code P0 0 05 If the input address has no corresponding function code the default value in the input address is 0 The ten thousands in P3 2 28 and P3 2 29 indicate the operation mode of the digital value in input address 0 means the operation by unsigned number and 1 means the operation by signed number Function Code P3 2 30 is used to set the setting coefficient of Operation 1 Function code Function name Setting scope Input A of Operation 2 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 2 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed
293. tion code Function name Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Setting scope P3 0 03 Phase Directive 0 100 0 100 0 P3 0 04 Phase O Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 05 Phase Directive 1 100 0 100 0 P3 0 06 Phase 1 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 07 Phase Directive 2 100 0 100 0 P3 0 08 Phase 2 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 09 Phase Directive 3 100 0 100 0 P3 0 10 Phase 3 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 11 Phase Directive 4 100 0 100 0 P3 0 12 Phase 4 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 13 Phase Directive 5 100 0 100 0 P3 0 14 Phase 5 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 15 Phase Directive 6 100 0 100 0 P3 0 16 Phase 6 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 17 Phase Directive 7 100 0 100 0 P3 0 18 Phase 7 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 19 Phase Directive 8 100 0 100 0 P3 0 20 Phase 8 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 21 Phase Directive 9 100 0 100 0 P3 0 22 Phase 9 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 23 Phase Directive 10 100 0 100 0 P3 0 24 Phase 10 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 25 Phase Directive 11 100 0 100 0 P3 0 26 Phase 11 Running Time 0000 0s 6553 5s P3 0 27 Phase Directive 12 100 0 100 0 P3 0 28 Phase 12
294. tion of multi functional output terminals is Detected FDT1 Output of Frequency Level 3 refer to the Description of the figure below Output frequency a Lagged Frequency Value of FDT1 l l I l TON 1 Time I l Frequency arrival at l l detection signal l l l Time gt Lagged FDT1 Frequency Value Detected Frequency FDT1 P2 2 03 X Lagged Value of FDT1 Page 117 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope P2 2 05 Frequency Detection FDT2 000 00Hz Highest Frequency P2 2 06 FDT2 Lagged Value 000 0 100 0 FDT2 has the same function with FDT1 refer to the Description for FDT1 P2 2 03 and P2 2 04 for more details Corresponding function of multi functional output terminals is Frequency Level Detection FDT2 25 Function code Function name Setting scope Detected Frequency Value 1 upon P2 2 07 000 00Hz Highest Frequency Arbitrary Arrival Detected Frequency 1 Width upon P2 2 08 Arbitrary Arrival 000 0 100 0 When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is within any positive and negative frequency with detected width of the reference frequency that arrives at Detected Frequency Value 1 the multi functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is beyond any positive and negative frequency with detected width of
295. tly Put in the correct setup The motor rotates in opposite direction Is the wiring of terminals U V and W correct Wire them to the lead wires U V and W of the motor in accordance with the phase sequence Is the input signal connection right for the forward backward rotation Change the wiring The motor rotates but is incapable of speed changing Is the wiring of the frequency reference circuit correct Change the wiring Has the operation mode been correctly set up Check the selected running mode with an operator Is the load too much Reduce load The rotation speed rpm min of the motor is too high or too low Are the rated values number of poles voltage right Check the technical data on the nameplate of the motor Is the acceleration deceleration gear shifting ratio of the gear wheel right Checking the shifting gears like the gear wheel and so on Has the maximum output frequency been correctly set up Check the set value of the maximum output frequency Check the voltage between the terminals of the motor with a rectifier type voltmeter Is there too much voltage drop Check the V F characteristic value The rotation speed of the running motor is unsteady Page 212 Is the load too much Reduce load Is the change of load too much Reduce load change increase the motor capacity of the frequency inverter What abo
296. to set the logic operation function of Input 1 and Input 2 The hundreds and tens are used to set the option for Input 1 Ten Thousands and Thousands are used to set the option for Input 2 The Intermediate Delay Relay M is the result from simple logic operation of Input 1 and Input 2 M Logic Operation Input 1 and Input 2 Refer to 7 1 12 for more details Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function Page 127 Chapter 6 Descri Function code ption of Parameters Function Name Setting scope P3 2 07 Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Contro 1 Word C P3 2 08 Intermediate Delay Relay M2 Control Word C P3 2 09 Intermediate Delay Relay M3 Control Word C P3 2 10 Intermediate Delay Relay M4 Control Word C P3 2 11 Intermediate Delay Relay M5 Control Word C Tens Ones 00 59 Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Digital Input Terminal Thousands Hundreds 00 59 Output Function 00 59 Corresponding to Multi functional Output Terminal The tens and ones of the above function codes are used to set the action destination of acquiring the Intermediate Delay Relay after logic operation results that is action to be performed it can correspond to any one kind of digital input functions and the thousands and hundreds are used to control corresponding relay when which digit of Function Code P3 2 00 is 2 it can correspond to any one kind of mu Internal Relay Programmable Functio
297. tor through Function Code P0 0 24 If the identification cannot be made on site according to the parameters provided by the motor manufacturer it is to input them into the above corresponding function code Page 78 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Function Name Setting scope 00 No action 01 Static identification 02 Complete identification Parameter Identification R 11 Synchronous machine on load identification Invalid E100 12 Synchronous machine non load identification Invalid E100 Control Refer to 7 1 17 for more details Parameter Identification P0 1 Expansion Group Function Name Setting scope 0 Frequency Source A 1 Frequency Source B 2 Frequency Source A B 3 Frequency Source A B Option of Frequency 4 Max Value ofA amp B Source 5 Min Value ofA amp B 6 Standby Frequency Source 1 7 Standby Frequency Source 2 8 Switch of Terminal among the above 8 kinds 0 Frequency Source A The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source A P0 0 04 1 Frequency Source B The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source B P0 1 01 2 Frequency Source A B The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source A B 3 Frequency Source A B The reference frequency is given by A B Frequency if A B Frequency is negative value the frequency inverter runs in opposite direction 4 Max Value ofA amp B The reference frequency is determined by the
298. tor or frequency inverter is large enough Over current at deceleration When the frequency inverter decelerates output current exceeds overcurrent 2 2 times of rated current of the frequency inverter Check whether the motor is and its lines are short circuit grounded or too long Conduct parameter identification Delay the deceleration time Check whether the input voltage is relatively low Check whether the load has mutation Install additional brake unit and brake resistance Page 208 Over voltage at constant speed When the frequency inverter runs at constant speed DC voltage of the main circuit exceeds this set value Detected DC overvoltage value Level T2 400V Level T4 750V Level T6 1300V Check whether the input voltage is too high Check whether the bus voltage display is normal Check whether the motor is dragged to run by external force in the running process Fault display Description Details Chapter 9 Fault Handling Fault elimination Over voltage at acceleration When the frequency inverter runs at constant speed DC voltage of the main circuit exceeds this set value The detected overvoltage value is the same as above Check whe too high Check whether the bus voltage display is normal Delay the deceleration time Check whether the motor is dragged to run by external force in the process of de
299. tory Value P2 0 23 Minimum Input of PULS 0 00kHz P2 0 25 000 00 P2 0 24 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of 100 0 100 0 000 0 PULS P2 0 25 Maximum Input of PULS P2 0 23 100 00kHz 050 00 P2 0 26 Se a reference for Maximum Input of 100 0 100 0 100 0 P2 0 27 PULS Filtering time 00 00s 10 00s 00 10 The above function codes are used to set the relation between PULS Impulse Frequency and corresponding reference value that is straight line relationship When the input impulse frequency is greater than the given Max PULS Input P2 0 25 the impulse frequency is calculated at Max PULS Input similarly when the input impulse frequency is lower than the given Min PULS Input P2 0 23 the impulse frequency is calculated at Min PULS Input PULS Input Filtering time is used to set the software filtering time of PULS Impulse Frequency when the on site impulse is easily to be interrupted the filtering time shall be increased to make the detected impulse frequency tend to be stable but the greater filtering time makes the response speed of detecting the impulse frequency become slow how to set needs to balance based on actual situations of the applications Note when the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding frequency the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to highest frequency When the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding torque the correspond
300. tput FM2 9 Keyboard Potentiometer Voltage Reference 10 Actual Length Value 11 Actual Counting Value 12 Communication Reference 13 Motor Speed 14 Output Current 15 Bus Voltage FMP Output Reference 16 Output Torque Use Terminal YO FMP 17 Operation Result 1 as FMP i e P2 1 20 0 18 Operation Result 2 19 Operation Result 3 20 Operation Result 4 Analog FM1 Output Offset 100 0 100 0 Analog FM1 Output Gains 10 00 10 00 Analog FM2 Output Offset 100 0 100 0 Analog FM2 Output Gains 10 00 10 00 Group P2 1 Extension Group 0 Active High Level 1 Active Low Level Ones DI1 Tens DI2 Hundreds DI3 Thousands DI4 Ten Thousands Di5 Valid Model Selection 1 of Terminal DI 0 Active High Level 1 Active Low Level Ones DI6 Valid Model Selection 2 Tens DI7 Invalid E100 of Terminal DI Hundreds DI8 Invalid E100 Thousands DI9 Invalid E100 Ten Thousands DI10 Invalid E100 Page 51 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function Function name code Setting scope Analog Input Curve Bele Selection 1 2 ug Ones Curve Selected for VF1 Tens Curve Selected for VF2 Selection for Curve less than Min Reference 0 Corresponding Min Input Reference e 0 Ones VFI less than Min Input Tens VF2 less than Min Input Min Input of Curve 3 00 00V P2 1 06 Corresponding reference
301. uency inverter drives more than one set of motor 1 SVC Don t need to externally connect the encoder as speed feedback and be applicable for general and high powered occasions one set of frequency inverter only drives one set of motor 2 VC Need to externally connect the encoder as speed feedback and be applicable for occasions with high precision speed control or torque control one set of frequency inverter only drives one set of motor CDI E180 Series hasn t had this function and doesn t need to have external expansion card of the encoder If the load motor is permanent magnet synchronous motor the VC shall be selected Note if the vector control mode is selected it is better to identify the parameters of the motor only precise parameters of the motor can give play to the advantages of VC Mode Function code Function Name Setting scope 0 Keyboard Control Option of operation control j 1 Terminal Control mode ae 2 Communication Control 0 Keyboard Control Key RUN STOP and JOG on operating panel control start stop and FWD amp REV switch of the frequency inverter 1 Terminal Input Use the digital input terminal to control FWD REV and stop of the frequency inverter 2 Communication Control Use the principal computer to control 1 FWD REV stop jog and reset Refer to Chapter VIII for more details Detailed methods for the above three kinds of control methods refer to 7 1 1 Page 73 Chapter 6
302. uency inverter after the output current exceeds the overcurrent stall protection current the frequency inverter stops the acceleration and deceleration process and keeps current running frequency and then continues to accelerate and decelerate after the decline of the output current The setting value of the function code P6 1 05 is the percentage relative to rated current of the motor The Overcurrent Stall Protection Sensitivity is used to adjust the capability of the frequency inverter on restraining the overcurrent in its acceleration and deceleration process The greater this value is the stronger the capability of restraining the overcurrent is under the precondition that no overcurrent fault occurs the smaller the setting value is and the better it is Function code Function Name Setting scope 00 no auto reset under failure P6 1 06 Fault Auto Reset Number 01 20 Waiting Interval Time of Fault Auto Reset P6 1 07 000 1s 100 0s When at P6 1 06 0 the frequency inverter keeps fault state for there is no automatic fault reset function When at P6 1 06 gt 0 the frequency inverter selects the times of automatic fault reset In case of exceeding the selected times the frequency inverter keeps fault state Function P6 1 07 refers to the waiting time from fault alarm of the frequency inverter to automatic fault reset Page 148 Function code Function Name Chapter 6 Description of Parameters
303. uency of Frequency Source A P9 0 26 Frequency of Frequency Source B P9 0 27 Communication Set value P9 0 28 Impulse frequency P9 0 29 Encoder Feedback Speed P9 0 30 Actual Distance Value P9 0 31 P9 0 45 Reservation P9 0 46 Operation Result 1 P9 0 47 Operation Result 2 P9 0 48 Operation Result 3 P9 0 49 Operation Result 4 P9 0 50 ser Standby Monitoring ue 2 P9 0 51 an er Standby Monitoring ue 2 rs P9 0 52 a er Standby Monitoring ue 3 is P9 0 53 a er Standby Monitoring ue 4 2 P9 0 54 BD er Standby Monitoring alue 5 Page 71 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 1 Group 0 Basic Function P0 0 Group Basic Group Function code Function Name Setting scope 1 G Type constant torque load type P0 0 00 Type of Frequency inverter a a 7 2 P Type fans and water pump load type This function code is only for the users to check the factory type of the frequency inverter and is generally not allowed to be modified by the users If modification is required the function code P5 0 18 must be first changed to 2 1 G Typeapplicable for constant torque load 80 2 P Type applicable for fans and water pump load Function Name Setting scope 0 Basic Mode Prefix with P Display Mode 1 User Mode Prefix w
304. uency of digital input terminal D16 the terminal function is not defined The corresponding relationship between high speed impulse frequency and torque upper limit value can be set through Function Code P2 0 23 P2 0 26 that is linear relationship 5 Communication Reference The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the upper computer through communication mode refer to Chapter VIII for more details Page 95 Chapter 6 Description of Parameters 6 MIN VF1 VF2 The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the input value of VF1 and VF2 whichever is lower 7 MAX VFI VF2 The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the input value of VF1 and VF2 whichever is larger 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 Note when the upper limit of the vector control torque is set by VF1 amp VF2 multiplex directive PULSE communication and operation results the corresponding range is the value set by P1 1 08 Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 08 Torque Upper Limit Reference 000 0 200 150 0 When at P1 1 07 0 the setting value of this function code determines the upper limit of the vector control torque which is the percentage relative to the rated torque of the motor Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value P1 1 09 Inversion Control Enable 0 Allow 1 Prohibit 0 This function code i
305. uency or lower frequency output Signal ON Torque Limit When the output torque of frequency inverter reaches limit value of the torque in speed control mode output Signal ON Ready for Running When main circuits and control circuit power of the frequency inverter have been stable and the inventor hasn t defected out any fault information and the frequency inverter is in running state output Signal ON VF1 gt VF2 When the input value of VFI is greater than the input value of VF2 output Signal ON Upper Frequency Arrival When the output frequency reaches upper frequency output Signal ON Lower Frequency Arrival no output when shut down When the output frequency reaches lower frequency and the frequency inverter is in running state output Signal ON Undervoltage state output When the frequency inverter is in undervoltage state output Signal ON Communication Reference Refer to the Description of Chapter 8 VFI Output less than Lower Limit When the value of the Analog VF1 Input is less than the value set by Function Code P2 2 19 Lower Limit of VFI Input output Signal ON Page 108 VFI Output more Upper Limit When the value of the Analog VF1 Input is greater than the value set by Function Code P2 2 20 Upper Limit of VF1 Input output Signal ON Setting value Function Chapter 6 Description of Parameters Description 23 Zero speed
306. unication Control Function code Function name Setting scope Factory Value Group P4 0 PID Control Group PID Reference Source 0 Digital Reference P4 0 01 1 Keyboard Potentiometer Reference 2 External Terminal VF1 Reference 3 External Terminal VF2 Reference 4 PULS Reference DI6 5 Communication Reference 6 Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference 7 Simple PLC Reference 8 Operation Result 1 9 Operation Result 2 10 Operation Result 3 11 Operation Result 4 PID Value Reference 000 0 100 0 050 0 PID Feedback Source External Terminal VFI Referenced External Terminal VF1 Referenca VFI VF2 VF1 VF2 PULS Reference DI6 Communication Reference MAX VF1 VF2 MIN VF1 VF2 Switch of Multiplex Directive Terminal on the above conditions 9 Operation Result 1 10 Operation Result 2 11 Operation Result 3 12 Operation Result 4 PID Action Direction 0 Direct Action 1 Reverse Action Page 60 PID Reference Feedback Range 00000 65535 Function code Function name Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Setting scope P4 0 05 Proportional Gains KP1 000 0 100 0 P4 0 06 Integral Time TI1 00 01s 10 00s P4 0 07 Derivative Time Td1 00 000s 10 000s P4 0 08 PID Deviation Limit 000 0 100 0 P4 0 09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00 00s 60 00s P4 0 10
307. ut 30 When the reference time is 0 the fixed time is not limited Actual time of current running can be viewed through Function Code P9 0 23 when the frequency inverter shuts down the display value of P9 0 23 automatically resets to 0 Timing Run Time P3 1 02 _ Free P3 1 01 0 Stop Option for T ae XP3 1 02 P3 1 01 1 Timing Run D T Running Percentage Time P3 1 00 Time Arrival Patoa as Multi functional i meee x gt Output Terminal Output VF2Input x p3 1 02 P2 0 28 P2 0 32 30 Range Percentage Page 166 7 1 9 Fixed length Function Function Code Function name Setting Scope Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case Factory Value P3 1 08 Reference Length 00000m 65535m 01000 P3 1 09 Actual Length 00000m 65535m 00000 P3 1 10 Impulse Count per meter 0000 1 6553 5 0100 0 E Series Frequency inverter has built in fixed length function to realize fixed length control In the application corresponding digital input terminal is required to be set as Length Counting Input Function 30 When the input impulse frequency is higher Terminal DI16 must be adopted The formula for length calculation is as below Actual Length Total Impulses from Acquisition of Terminal Impulses per meter When actual length reaches the reference length valu
308. ut the power supply Is it a 3 phase or a single phase one If it is a 3 phase one is there any phase loss Check the wiring of the 3 phase power supply for possible phase loss Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts Appendix 1 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Methods Items for inspection Description Period Yearly Biennial Inspection method Criteria Measuring instrument Surroun dings Is there an dust Are the ambient temperature and humidit appropriate See the precautions Temperature 10 40 C no dust humidity below 90 and no dew formation Thermometer hygrometer anda recorder Equipment Is there any abnormal vibration or noise Look see No abnormality Is the input voltage of the main circuit normal Measure the voltage between the terminals R S and T Digital AVO meter tester The entire operating site Megger examination of the resistance between the main circuit and earth for any loosened parts Overheat on any parts Clean Disconnect the frequency inverter Short circuit the terminals R S T U V W and measure the resistance between them and the earth Tighten the bolts Check with naked eyes Over 5 M2 and fault ree DC 500V type megger Conductor wiring Conductor rusty Wire sheath damaged Check with naked eyes No fault Terminals Any damage
309. uts can respectively select any one of four kinds of the curves Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship refer to the setting of P2 0 13 P2 0 22 for more details while Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points refer to the setting of P2 1 04 P2 1 19 for more details Function code Function Name Setting scope Selection for Curve less than Min Reference Ones VF1 less than Min Input Tens VF2 less than Min Input 0 Corresponding Min Input Reference 1 0 0 This function code is used to set how to determine the corresponding reference of the analog when the analog input is less than the given Min Input The ones and tens of this function code respectively correspond to VF1 and VF2 If it is 0 when VF input is lower than Min Input this corresponding reference of this analog is Corresponding reference of Min Input P2 0 14 P2 0 19 P2 1 05 P2 1 13 of the selected curve If it is 1 when VF input is lower than Min Input this corresponding reference of this analog is 0 0 Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P2 1 04 Min Input of Curve 3 00 00V P2 1 06 P2 1 05 Corresponding re ference for Min Input of Curve 3 100 0 100 0 P2 1 06 Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 Input P2 1 04 P2 1 08 P2 1 07 Corresponding re Point 1 Input ference for Curve 3 Inflection 100 0 100 0 P2
310. verter is in inverse proportion to its feedback quantity when the feedback quantity is greater than the given quantity the output frequency of the frequency inverter rises to make the feedback quantity decline accordingly and final feedback quantity equal to the given quantity Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 04 PID Reference Feedback Range 00000 65535 01000 The feedback range of PID Reference is dimensionless unit which is the range of PID Reference showing P9 0 14 and PID Feedback showing P9 0 15 If P4 0 04 is set at 5000 when the feedback value of PID is 100 0 PID Feedback showing P9 0 15 is 5000 PID Reference and Feedback are set based on this parameter Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory Value P4 0 05 Proportional Gains KP1 000 0 100 0 020 0 P4 0 06 Integral Time TI1 00 01s 10 00s 02 00 P4 0 07 Derivative Time Td1 00 000s 10 000s 00 000 The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is the larger the adjustment volume is and the faster the response is but the too large value can generate the system oscillation the smaller the value of KPI is the more stable the system is and the slower the response is The greater the value of Integral Time TI1 is the slower the response is and the more stable the output is the worse the fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is the smaller the value of TII is the faster the response is and the greater the
311. vices with poor anti interference capabilities in the vicinity filters should be installed While installing make sure the wiring is as short as possible that is the filter should be as close to the frequency inverter as possible A2 4 Remote Operation Keyboard Our series frequency inverters have all been equipped with operation keyboards exquisitely designed and easily operated If you wish to use it away from the frequency inverter or other places an extended cable would serve the purpose You just need to demand it when you place an order Since the serial communication mode is employed to link the keyboard and the frame you can remove the keyboard to work area as far as 10 meters away Or if you want to or need to work father away then you can buy a remote operation keyboard from the suppliers concerned or from our company A2 5 Energy Consumption Brake Unit and Brake Resistance CDI E100 Series frequency inverter is configured with built in brake unit if the brake torque is required to be added it is to directly connect the brake resistance CDI E180 Series Frequency inverter with power 15kW and below is configured with built in brake unit if the brake torque is required to be added it is only required to externally connect brake resistance The types with power 15kW and above is not configured with built in brake unit if the brake torque is required to be added it is required to externally connect brake unit and brake resistance
312. xpress address of Input B of Operation Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Setting Coefficient of Operation 2 00000 65535 Input A of Operation 3 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 9 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Input B of Operation 3 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 3 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Setting Coefficient of Operation 3 00000 65535 Input A of Operation 4 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input A of Operation 4 Ten Thousands express input operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number Page 59 Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters Function code Function name Setting scope Input B of Operation 4 Thousands Hundreds Tens and Ones express address of Input B of Operation 4 Ten Thousands operation model 0 Input is operation by unsigned number 1 Input is operation by signed number express input Setting Coefficient of Operation 4 00000 65535 5 5 Group P4 PID Control And Comm
313. y can acquire five parameter values of P0 0 19 P0 0 23 11 Load Synchronous Machine Identification When the load cannot completely separate from the synchronous motor this mode can be adopted Before conducting the identification the parameter value of P P0 0 13 P0 0 18 P0 1 26 PO 1 27 and P0 1 34 must be set correctly After completing the setting and pressing Key RUN the frequency inverter operates the Load Synchronous Machine Identification the completion of the identification can acquire initial position angle of the synchronous and the initial position angle is the necessary conditions for normal operation of the synchronous motor so the first use of the synchronous motor must conduct identification 12 Non load Synchronous Machine Identification When the load completely separates from the synchronous motor this mode can be adopted if the conditions allow please try to adopt this mode for it has better effect such a mode can acquire accurate parameters of the motor so as to achieve better running performance of the synchronous motor Before conducting the identification the parameter value of 0 0 13 P0 0 18 PO 1 26 PO 1 27 and PO 1 34 must be set correctly Steps for Motor Parameter Identification 1 If the motor can completely separate from the load please confirm its state and the motor cannot influence other related devices when the motor is rotating 2 After power on please confirm that the Parameter PO 0 13 P0 0 18 of
314. ystem and then adds 4 digits that is 25 The lower order address is 12 by decimal system which is OC after conversion into hexadecimal system so the address indicates 0x250C Page 204 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication Table of Definitions for Non functional Function Code Parameter Address Definition Function Code Parameter Address Description for Function Command to Frequency inverter 0001H Forward Run 0002H Reverse Run 0003H Forward Jogging 0004H Reverse Jogging 0005H Free Stop 0006H Shutdown By Speed Reduction 0007H Fault Rest Frequency Command or Upper Frequency Source refer to the percentage of the highest frequency without storage 00 00 100 00 indicates 00 00 100 00 Multi functional Output Terminal YO1 BITO valid only when E180 adds I O expansion card E100 is invalid Multi functional Output Terminal YO2 BIT1 valid only when E180 adds I O expansion card E100 is invalid BIT2 Multi functional Output Terminal T1 BIT3 Multi functional Output Terminal T2 Multi functional Output Terminal YO when BIT4 Terminal YO FMPis used as YO that is P2 1 20 1 If it is required to make multi functional output terminal valid set corresponding position to 1 after transfer binary system to hexadecimal system send it to address A002 FM1 Output Address 00 0 100 0 indicates
315. yte is finished Step 6 Repeat Step 2 5 for next byte of the communication data until the handling to all bytes are completed the final content of CRC Register is the value of CRC When transmitting CRC Value first add the low byte and then high byte that is the low byte is first transmitted Page 202 Chapter 8 E Series Frequency inverter RS 485 Communication In case of any fault of the communication the slave machine responds the data of ADRESS and DATA are as below Description Description Invalid address Invalid parameter CRC Check Error Invalid Modification to Parameter Read and Write Command Error System Lock Password Error The master station writes the command string format Write Command 06H Function Code Address Parameter under Storage Data content CRC Check 1Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte Name of Character Slave Station Length of 1Byt Character ye Example 01H The slave station responds the command string format 06H Write Command 06H 0005H Function Code Address 1388H Data content 949DH CRC Check Name of R Character Slave Station Length of IByte Character Example The master station reads the command string format 1Byte Read Command 03H 2Byte Initial Address of Function Code 2Byte Data content 2Byte CRC Check Name of Character Slave Statio

Address: No.8, Economic Plot, Zhuantang Science and Technology

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents